Você está na página 1de 282

1 Cabinet ........................................................................................................... 1.1 Structure ................................................................................................. 1.2 Capacity ................................................................................................. 1.3 Parameters ............................................................................................. 2 Power Box ..................................................................................................... 2.

1 Functions ................................................................................................ 2.2 Panel Description ................................................................................... 2.3 DIP Switches .......................................................................................... 2.4 Interface Description .............................................................................. 2.4.1 SERIAL Interface ........................................................................... 2.4.2 ALARM Interface ............................................................................ 2.5 Technical Parameters ............................................................................ 3 Subrack .......................................................................................................... 3.1 Structure ................................................................................................. 3.2 Interface Area ......................................................................................... 3.3 Fan Tray Assembly ................................................................................ 3.4 Parameters ............................................................................................. 4 DCM Frame and HUB Frame ........................................................................ 4.1 Dispersion Compensation Module (DCM) .............................................. 4.1.1 Working Principle ........................................................................... 4.1.2 Functions ....................................................................................... 4.1.3 Application ..................................................................................... 4.1.4 Parameters .................................................................................... 4.2 DCM Frame ............................................................................................ 4.3 HUB Frame ............................................................................................ 5 Overview of Boards ...................................................................................... 5.1 Board Category ...................................................................................... 5.2 Board Appearance ................................................................................. 6 Optical Transponder Unit ............................................................................. 6.1 LWF/LWFS ............................................................................................. 6.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.1.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.1.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6.2 LRF/LRFS .............................................................................................. 6.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.2.2 Working Principle ...........................................................................

1-1 1-2 1-4 1-4 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-4 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-9 3-1 3-1 3-3 3-5 3-6 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-2 4-2 4-2 4-4 5-1 5-1 5-4 6-1 6-2 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-8 6-8 6-9

6.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.2.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6.3 LBE/LBES .............................................................................................. 6.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.3.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.3.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6.4 TMX/TMXS ............................................................................................. 6.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.4.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.4.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6.5 TMR/TMRS ............................................................................................ 6.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.5.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.5.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6.6 LWC1 ..................................................................................................... 6.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.6.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6.6.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.6.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6.7 TRC1 ...................................................................................................... 6.7.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.7.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6.7.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.7.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6.8 LWM ....................................................................................................... 6.8.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.8.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6.8.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.8.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6.9 LWMR .................................................................................................... 6.9.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 6.9.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 6.9.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 6.9.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 6.10 LWX...................................................................................................... 6.10.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 6.10.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 6.10.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................

6-10 6-11 6-13 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-18 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-24 6-24 6-25 6-25 6-27 6-29 6-29 6-29 6-30 6-32 6-35 6-35 6-36 6-36 6-38 6-39 6-39 6-40 6-41 6-42 6-44 6-44 6-45 6-45 6-47 6-48 6-48 6-49 6-50

6.10.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 6.11 LWXR ................................................................................................... 6.11.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 6.11.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 6.11.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 6.11.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 6.12 LDG/FDG ............................................................................................. 6.12.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 6.12.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 6.12.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 6.12.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 6.13 LOG/LOGS ........................................................................................... 6.13.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 6.13.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 6.13.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 6.13.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit ............................ 7.1 M40 and V40 .......................................................................................... 7.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.1.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 7.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.1.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 7.2 D40 ......................................................................................................... 7.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.2.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 7.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.2.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 7.3 MR2 ........................................................................................................ 7.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.3.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 7.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.3.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 7.4 DWC ....................................................................................................... 7.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.4.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 7.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.4.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 7.5 ITL .......................................................................................................... 7.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.5.2 Working Principle ...........................................................................

6-51 6-54 6-54 6-54 6-55 6-57 6-59 6-59 6-59 6-60 6-62 6-64 6-64 6-65 6-66 6-67 7-1 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-5 7-6 7-6 7-7 7-7 7-9 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-11 7-13 7-14 7-14 7-15 7-16 7-17 7-19 7-19 7-19

7.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.5.4 Parameter Description ................................................................... 7.5.5 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 7.6 FIU .......................................................................................................... 7.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 7.6.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 7.6.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 7.6.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 8 Optical Amplifier Unit ................................................................................... 8.1 OAU ........................................................................................................ 8.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.1.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 8.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.1.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 8.2 OBU ........................................................................................................ 8.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.2.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 8.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.2.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 8.3 OPU ........................................................................................................ 8.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.3.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 8.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.3.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 8.4 HBA ........................................................................................................ 8.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.4.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 8.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.4.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 8.5 Raman Amplifier ..................................................................................... 8.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 8.5.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 8.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 8.5.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units .......................................... 9.1 MCA ....................................................................................................... 9.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.1.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 9.1.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................

7-20 7-21 7-21 7-22 7-23 7-23 7-25 7-28 8-1 8-2 8-2 8-3 8-3 8-6 8-11 8-11 8-12 8-12 8-14 8-16 8-16 8-17 8-17 8-18 8-20 8-20 8-20 8-21 8-23 8-24 8-24 8-25 8-26 8-27 9-1 9-1 9-2 9-2 9-3

9.1.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 9.2 VA4......................................................................................................... 9.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.2.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 9.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.2.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 9.3 VOA ........................................................................................................ 9.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.3.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 9.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.3.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 9.4 DGE ........................................................................................................ 9.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.4.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 9.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.4.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 9.5 DSE ........................................................................................................ 9.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.5.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 9.5.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.5.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 9.6 GFU ........................................................................................................ 9.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................... 9.6.2 Working Principle ........................................................................... 9.6.3 Front Panel .................................................................................... 9.6.4 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units................................................ 10.1 FMU...................................................................................................... 10.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 10.1.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 10.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 10.1.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 10.2 MWA ..................................................................................................... 10.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 10.2.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 10.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 10.2.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 10.3 MWF ..................................................................................................... 10.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 10.3.2 Working Principle .........................................................................

9-4 9-5 9-5 9-5 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-9 9-9 9-9 9-11 9-12 9-12 9-12 9-13 9-15 9-16 9-16 9-16 9-16 9-18 9-19 9-19 9-19 9-20 9-22 10-1 10-2 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-5 10-7 10-7 10-7 10-9 10-11 10-12 10-12 10-13

10.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 10-14 10.3.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 10-17 11 Protection Units .......................................................................................... 11.1 OCP...................................................................................................... 11.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 11.1.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 11.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 11.1.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 11.2 OLP ...................................................................................................... 11.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 11.2.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 11.2.3 Switching Type ............................................................................. 11.2.4 Front Panel .................................................................................. 11.2.5 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 11.3 SCS ...................................................................................................... 11.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 11.3.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 11.3.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 11.3.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 11.4 PBU ...................................................................................................... 11.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 11.4.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 11.4.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 11.4.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit .................................................................................................................... 12.1 SC1/SC2 .............................................................................................. 12.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 12.1.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 12.1.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 12.1.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 12.2 TC1/TC2 ............................................................................................... 12.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 12.2.2 Working Principle ......................................................................... 12.2.3 Front Panel .................................................................................. 12.2.4 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 12.3 SCC/SCE ............................................................................................. 12.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................. 12.3.2 Working principle ......................................................................... 12.3.3 Functional Interfaces .................................................................... 11-1 11-2 11-2 11-2 11-3 11-5 11-6 11-6 11-6 11-7 11-8 11-10 11-11 11-11 11-11 11-12 11-14 11-15 11-15 11-16 11-17 11-18 12-1 12-2 12-2 12-2 12-3 12-5 12-6 12-6 12-7 12-8 12-10 12-11 12-11 12-13 12-13

12.3.4 Front Panel .................................................................................. 12-14 12.3.5 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 12-16 A Indicators ...................................................................................................... A.1 Cabinet Indicators .................................................................................. A.2 Board Indicators ..................................................................................... A.2.1 Alarm Indicator .............................................................................. A.2.2 Running Indicator .......................................................................... A.2.3 Communication Indicator ............................................................... B Power Consumption and Weight of the Boards ........................................ C Glossary ........................................................................................................ D Acronyms and Abbreviations ..................................................................... Index ................................................................................................................. A-1 A-1 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-3 B-1 C-1 D-1

OptiX BWS 1600G Backbone DWDM Optical Transmission System Hardware Description
V100R003

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX BWS 1600G Backbone DWDM Optical Transmission System Hardware Description
BOM Date Document Version 31250380 June 30, 2006 T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd., Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China Postal Code: 518129 Website: http://www.huawei.com Email: support@huawei.com

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Copyright 2006 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC, TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800, TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN, HUAWEIOptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye, Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Contents

Contents
About This Document......................................................................................................................i Documentation Set Guide..............................................................................................................v 1 Cabinet .........................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Structure ...................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.2 Capacity....................................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.3 Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 1-4

2 Power Box ....................................................................................................................................2-1


2.1 Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Panel Description......................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.3 DIP Switches ............................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.4 Interface Description ................................................................................................................... 2-5 2.4.1 SERIAL Interface .............................................................................................................. 2-5 2.4.2 ALARM Interface .............................................................................................................. 2-5 2.5 Technical Parameters................................................................................................................... 2-9

3 Subrack.........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Structure ...................................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Interface Area .............................................................................................................................. 3-3 3.3 Fan Tray Assembly ...................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.4 Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 3-6

4 DCM Frame and HUB Frame...................................................................................................4-1


4.1 Dispersion Compensation Module (DCM).................................................................................. 4-1 4.1.1 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 4-1 4.1.2 Functions............................................................................................................................ 4-1 4.1.3 Application......................................................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.4 Parameters.......................................................................................................................... 4-2 4.2 DCM Frame................................................................................................................................. 4-2 4.3 HUB Frame ................................................................................................................................. 4-4

5 Overview of Boards ...................................................................................................................5-1


5.1 Board Category............................................................................................................................ 5-1

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Contents

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

5.2 Board Appearance ....................................................................................................................... 5-4

6 Optical Transponder Unit ........................................................................................................6-1


6.1 LWF/LWFS ................................................................................................................................. 6-2 6.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 6-2 6.1.2 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 6-3 6.1.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.1.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................... 6-5 6.2 LRF/LRFS ................................................................................................................................... 6-8 6.2.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 6-8 6.2.2 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 6-9 6.2.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-10 6.2.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-11 6.3 LBE/LBES................................................................................................................................. 6-13 6.3.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-13 6.3.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 6-14 6.3.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-15 6.3.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-16 6.4 TMX/TMXS .............................................................................................................................. 6-18 6.4.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-18 6.4.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 6-19 6.4.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-20 6.4.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-21 6.5 TMR/TMRS .............................................................................................................................. 6-24 6.5.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-24 6.5.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 6-25 6.5.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-25 6.5.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-27 6.6 LWC1 ........................................................................................................................................ 6-29 6.6.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-29 6.6.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 6-29 6.6.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-30 6.6.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-32 6.7 TRC1 ......................................................................................................................................... 6-35 6.7.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-35 6.7.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 6-36 6.7.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-36 6.7.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-38 6.8 LWM.......................................................................................................................................... 6-39 6.8.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-39 6.8.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 6-40

ii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Contents

6.8.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-41 6.8.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-42 6.9 LWMR....................................................................................................................................... 6-44 6.9.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 6-44 6.9.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 6-45 6.9.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-45 6.9.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 6-47 6.10 LWX ........................................................................................................................................ 6-48 6.10.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 6-48 6.10.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 6-49 6.10.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 6-50 6.10.4 Technical Specifications................................................................................................. 6-51 6.11 LWXR...................................................................................................................................... 6-54 6.11.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 6-54 6.11.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 6-54 6.11.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 6-55 6.11.4 Technical Specifications................................................................................................. 6-57 6.12 LDG/FDG................................................................................................................................ 6-59 6.12.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 6-59 6.12.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 6-59 6.12.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 6-60 6.12.4 Technical Specifications................................................................................................. 6-62 6.13 LOG/LOGS ............................................................................................................................. 6-64 6.13.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 6-64 6.13.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 6-65 6.13.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 6-66 6.13.4 Technical Specifications................................................................................................. 6-67

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit .................................................7-1


7.1 M40 and V40............................................................................................................................... 7-2 7.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 7-2 7.1.2 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 7-2 7.1.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.1.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................... 7-5 7.2 D40 .............................................................................................................................................. 7-6 7.2.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.2.2 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 7-7 7.2.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 7-7 7.2.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................... 7-9 7.3 MR2........................................................................................................................................... 7-10 7.3.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 7-10

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

iii

Contents

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

7.3.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 7-10 7.3.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 7-11 7.3.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 7-13 7.4 DWC.......................................................................................................................................... 7-14 7.4.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 7-14 7.4.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 7-15 7.4.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 7-16 7.4.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 7-17 7.5 ITL............................................................................................................................................. 7-19 7.5.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 7-19 7.5.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 7-19 7.5.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 7-20 7.5.4 Parameter Description...................................................................................................... 7-21 7.5.5 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 7-21 7.6 FIU............................................................................................................................................. 7-22 7.6.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 7-23 7.6.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 7-23 7.6.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 7-25 7.6.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 7-28

8 Optical Amplifier Unit..............................................................................................................8-1


8.1 OAU ............................................................................................................................................ 8-2 8.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.2 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 8-3 8.1.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................... 8-6 8.2 OBU........................................................................................................................................... 8-11 8.2.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 8-11 8.2.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 8-12 8.2.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 8-12 8.2.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 8-14 8.3 OPU ........................................................................................................................................... 8-16 8.3.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 8-16 8.3.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 8-17 8.3.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 8-17 8.3.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 8-18 8.4 HBA........................................................................................................................................... 8-20 8.4.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 8-20 8.4.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 8-20 8.4.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 8-21 8.4.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 8-23

iv

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Contents

8.5 Raman Amplifier ....................................................................................................................... 8-24 8.5.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 8-24 8.5.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 8-25 8.5.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 8-26 8.5.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 8-27

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units ....................................................................9-1


9.1 MCA............................................................................................................................................ 9-1 9.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 9-2 9.1.2 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 9-2 9.1.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................... 9-4 9.2 VA4.............................................................................................................................................. 9-5 9.2.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 9-5 9.2.2 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 9-5 9.2.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 9-7 9.2.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................... 9-8 9.3 VOA ............................................................................................................................................ 9-9 9.3.1 Functionality ...................................................................................................................... 9-9 9.3.2 Working Principle .............................................................................................................. 9-9 9.3.3 Front Panel ......................................................................................................................... 9-9 9.3.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 9-11 9.4 DGE........................................................................................................................................... 9-12 9.4.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 9-12 9.4.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 9-12 9.4.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 9-13 9.4.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 9-15 9.5 DSE ........................................................................................................................................... 9-16 9.5.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 9-16 9.5.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 9-16 9.5.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 9-16 9.5.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 9-18 9.6 GFU ........................................................................................................................................... 9-19 9.6.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 9-19 9.6.2 Working Principle ............................................................................................................ 9-19 9.6.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................................................... 9-20 9.6.4 Technical Specifications .................................................................................................. 9-22

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units ......................................................................10-1


10.1 FMU ........................................................................................................................................ 10-2 10.1.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 10-2

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Contents

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

10.1.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 10-3 10.1.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 10-4 10.1.4 Technical Specifications................................................................................................. 10-5 10.2 MWA ....................................................................................................................................... 10-7 10.2.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 10-7 10.2.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 10-7 10.2.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 10-9 10.2.4 Technical Specifications............................................................................................... 10-11 10.3 MWF ..................................................................................................................................... 10-12 10.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................ 10-12 10.3.2 Working Principle ........................................................................................................ 10-13 10.3.3 Front Panel ................................................................................................................... 10-14 10.3.4 Technical Specifications............................................................................................... 10-17

11 Protection Units ......................................................................................................................11-1


11.1 OCP ......................................................................................................................................... 11-2 11.1.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 11-2 11.1.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 11-2 11.1.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 11-3 11.1.4 Technical Specifications................................................................................................. 11-5 11.2 OLP.......................................................................................................................................... 11-6 11.2.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 11-6 11.2.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 11-6 11.2.3 Switching Type............................................................................................................... 11-7 11.2.4 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 11-8 11.2.5 Technical Specifications............................................................................................... 11-10 11.3 SCS ........................................................................................................................................ 11-11 11.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................ 11-11 11.3.2 Working Principle ........................................................................................................ 11-11 11.3.3 Front Panel ................................................................................................................... 11-12 11.3.4 Technical Specifications............................................................................................... 11-14 11.4 PBU ....................................................................................................................................... 11-15 11.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................ 11-15 11.4.2 Working Principle ........................................................................................................ 11-16 11.4.3 Front Panel ................................................................................................................... 11-17 11.4.4 Technical Specifications............................................................................................... 11-18

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit ...............12-1
12.1 SC1/SC2 .................................................................................................................................. 12-2 12.1.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 12-2 12.1.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 12-2

vi

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Contents

12.1.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 12-3 12.1.4 Technical Specifications................................................................................................. 12-5 12.2 TC1/TC2.................................................................................................................................. 12-6 12.2.1 Functionality .................................................................................................................. 12-6 12.2.2 Working Principle .......................................................................................................... 12-7 12.2.3 Front Panel ..................................................................................................................... 12-8 12.2.4 Technical Specifications............................................................................................... 12-10 12.3 SCC/SCE ............................................................................................................................... 12-11 12.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................ 12-11 12.3.2 Working principle......................................................................................................... 12-13 12.3.3 Functional Interfaces.................................................................................................... 12-13 12.3.4 Front Panel ................................................................................................................... 12-14 12.3.5 Technical Specifications............................................................................................... 12-16

A Indicators .................................................................................................................................. A-1


A.1 Cabinet Indicators...................................................................................................................... A-1 A.2 Board Indicators ........................................................................................................................ A-2 A.2.1 Alarm Indicator ................................................................................................................ A-2 A.2.2 Running Indicator ............................................................................................................ A-2 A.2.3 Communication Indicator................................................................................................. A-3

B Power Consumption and Weight of the Boards.................................................................B-1 C Glossary......................................................................................................................................C-1 D Acronyms and Abbreviations............................................................................................... D-1 Index ................................................................................................................................................ i-1

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

vii

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Figures

Figures
Figure 1-1 Appearance of an OptiX BWS 1600G ............................................................................ 1-2 Figure 1-2 Exploded view of an OptiX BWS 1600G cabinet .......................................................... 1-3 Figure 2-1 Front view of a power box .............................................................................................. 2-2 Figure 2-2 PMU DIP switches.......................................................................................................... 2-4 Figure 2-3 Alarm cables between a SERIAL interface and the subracks ......................................... 2-5 Figure 2-4 ALARM pins diagram..................................................................................................... 2-6 Figure 2-5 Alarm cable ..................................................................................................................... 2-8 Figure 3-1 OptiX BWS 1600G subrack structure diagram............................................................... 3-1 Figure 3-2 The subrack interface area .............................................................................................. 3-3 Figure 3-3 Fan tray assembly ........................................................................................................... 3-5 Figure 3-4 Air circulation in the OptiX BWS 1600G subrack ......................................................... 3-6 Figure 4-1 DCM and HUB frames in an OptiX BWS 1600G cabinet.............................................. 4-3 Figure 5-1 Board appearance............................................................................................................ 5-4 Figure 6-1 Principle block diagram of the LWF and the LWFS....................................................... 6-3 Figure 6-2 Front panel of the LWF and the LWFS........................................................................... 6-4 Figure 6-3 Principle block diagram of the LRF and the LRFS ........................................................ 6-9 Figure 6-4 Front panel of the LRF and the LRFS........................................................................... 6-10 Figure 6-5 Principle block diagram of the LBE and the LBES ...................................................... 6-14 Figure 6-6 Front panel of the LBE and the LBES .......................................................................... 6-15 Figure 6-7 Principle block diagram of the TMX and the TMXS.................................................... 6-19 Figure 6-8 Front panel of the TMX and the TMXS........................................................................ 6-20 Figure 6-9 Principle block diagram of the TMR and the TMRS .................................................... 6-25 Figure 6-10 Front panel of the TMR and the TMRS ...................................................................... 6-26 Figure 6-11 Principle block diagram of the LWC1......................................................................... 6-30 Figure 6-12 Front panel of the LWC1 ............................................................................................ 6-31 Figure 6-13 Principle block diagram of the TRC1 ......................................................................... 6-36

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

ix

Figures

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Figure 6-14 Front panel of the TRC1 ............................................................................................. 6-37 Figure 6-15 Principle block diagram of the LWM ......................................................................... 6-40 Figure 6-16 Front panel of the LWM.............................................................................................. 6-41 Figure 6-17 Principle block diagram of the LWMR....................................................................... 6-45 Figure 6-18 Front panel of the LWMR........................................................................................... 6-46 Figure 6-19 Principle block diagram of the LWX .......................................................................... 6-49 Figure 6-20 Front panel of the LWX .............................................................................................. 6-50 Figure 6-21 Principle block diagram of the LWXR ....................................................................... 6-55 Figure 6-22 Front panel of the LWXR............................................................................................ 6-56 Figure 6-23 Principle block diagram of the LDG........................................................................... 6-60 Figure 6-24 Front panel of the LDG and the FDG ......................................................................... 6-61 Figure 6-25 Principle block diagram of the LOG and the LOGS................................................... 6-65 Figure 6-26 Front panel of the LOG and the LOGS....................................................................... 6-66 Figure 7-1 Principle block diagram of the M40 and the V40 ........................................................... 7-3 Figure 7-2 Front panel of the M40 and the V40 ............................................................................... 7-4 Figure 7-3 Principle block diagram of the D40 ................................................................................ 7-7 Figure 7-4 Front panel of the D40 .................................................................................................... 7-8 Figure 7-5 Principle block diagram of the MR2............................................................................. 7-11 Figure 7-6 Front panel of the MR2................................................................................................. 7-12 Figure 7-7 Principle block diagram of the DWC............................................................................ 7-15 Figure 7-8 Front panel of the DWC................................................................................................ 7-16 Figure 7-9 Principle block diagram of the ITL............................................................................... 7-19 Figure 7-10 Front panel of the ITL................................................................................................. 7-20 Figure 7-11 Principle block diagram of the FIU-01/FIU-02........................................................... 7-23 Figure 7-12 Principle block diagram of the FIU-03/06 .................................................................. 7-24 Figure 7-13 Principle block diagram of the FIU-04 ....................................................................... 7-25 Figure 7-14 Front panel of the FIU................................................................................................. 7-26 Figure 8-1 Principle block diagram of the OAU .............................................................................. 8-3 Figure 8-2 Front panel of the E2OAU .............................................................................................. 8-4 Figure 8-3 Front panel of the E3OAU .............................................................................................. 8-5 Figure 8-4 Front panel of the OBU................................................................................................. 8-13 Figure 8-5 Front panel of the OPU ................................................................................................. 8-17

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Figures

Figure 8-6 Principle block diagram of the HBA............................................................................. 8-21 Figure 8-7 Front panel of the HBA................................................................................................. 8-22 Figure 8-8 Functional block diagram of the RPA........................................................................... 8-25 Figure 8-9 Front panel of the RPA and RPC................................................................................... 8-26 Figure 9-1 Principle block diagram of the MCA.............................................................................. 9-2 Figure 9-2 Front panel of the MCA-8............................................................................................... 9-3 Figure 9-3 Principle block diagram of the VA4................................................................................ 9-6 Figure 9-4 Front panel of the VA4.................................................................................................... 9-7 Figure 9-5 Principle block diagram of the VOA .............................................................................. 9-9 Figure 9-6 Front panel of the VOA ................................................................................................ 9-10 Figure 9-7 Principle block diagram of the DGE............................................................................. 9-13 Figure 9-8 Front panel of the DGE................................................................................................. 9-14 Figure 9-9 Principle block diagram of the DSE ............................................................................. 9-16 Figure 9-10 Front panel of the DSE-I and the DSE-II.................................................................... 9-17 Figure 9-11 Location of the GFU in the system by working with E2OAU.................................... 9-19 Figure 9-12 Principle block diagram of the GFU ........................................................................... 9-20 Figure 9-13 Front panel of the GFU ............................................................................................... 9-21 Figure 10-1 Application of OAMS in the system (on-line monitoring) ......................................... 10-1 Figure 10-2 Principle block diagram of the FMU .......................................................................... 10-3 Figure 10-3 Front panel of the FMU .............................................................................................. 10-4 Figure 10-4 Principle block diagram of the MWA ......................................................................... 10-8 Figure 10-5 Front panel of the MWA-I and the MWA-II ............................................................... 10-9 Figure 10-6 Principle block diagram of the MWF-I..................................................................... 10-13 Figure 10-7 Principle block diagram of MWF-II ......................................................................... 10-14 Figure 10-8 Front panel of the MWF-I and the MWF-II.............................................................. 10-15 Figure 11-1 Principle block diagram of the OCP ........................................................................... 11-2 Figure 11-2 Front panel of the OCP ............................................................................................... 11-4 Figure 11-3 Principle block diagram of the OLP............................................................................ 11-7 Figure 11-4 Front panel of the OLP................................................................................................ 11-9 Figure 11-5 SCS in the OptiX BWS 1600G ................................................................................. 11-11 Figure 11-6 Principle block diagram of the SCS .......................................................................... 11-12 Figure 11-7 Front panel of the SCS .............................................................................................. 11-13

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

xi

Figures

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Figure 11-8 Principle block diagram of the PBU ......................................................................... 11-16 Figure 11-9 Front panel of the PBU ............................................................................................. 11-17 Figure 12-1 Principle block diagram of the SC1 ............................................................................ 12-3 Figure 12-2 Front panel of the SC1 and the SC2............................................................................ 12-4 Figure 12-3 Principle block diagram of the TC1 ............................................................................ 12-8 Figure 12-4 Front panel of the TC1 and the TC2 ........................................................................... 12-9 Figure 12-5 Logical functional block diagram of SCC ................................................................ 12-11 Figure 12-6 Principle block diagram of the SCC ......................................................................... 12-13 Figure 12-7 Front panel of the SCC and the SCE ........................................................................ 12-14

xii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Tables

Tables
Table 1-1 Full configuration of the 300 mm ETSI cabinets of various heights ................................ 1-4 Table 1-2 Dimensions and weight of the OptiX BWS 1600G cabinet ............................................. 1-4 Table 2-1 Functions of the units in a power box............................................................................... 2-1 Table 2-2 Description of the power panel......................................................................................... 2-3 Table 2-3 Settings and meanings of DIP switches ............................................................................ 2-4 Table 2-4 ALARM interface pin assignment .................................................................................... 2-7 Table 2-5 ALARM interface pin assignment .................................................................................... 2-8 Table 2-6 Technical parameters of the power box ............................................................................ 2-9 Table 3-1 Dimensions and weight of an OptiX BWS 1600G subrack.............................................. 3-6 Table 4-1 DCM type ......................................................................................................................... 4-1 Table 4-2 Dimensions and weight of a DCM ................................................................................... 4-2 Table 4-3 Dimensions and weight of a DCM frame ......................................................................... 4-3 Table 4-4 Dimensions of a HUB frame ............................................................................................ 4-4 Table 5-1 Board list........................................................................................................................... 5-2 Table 6-1 Comparison between the E2LWF and E3LWF................................................................. 6-4 Table 6-2 Comparison between the E2LWFS and E3LWFS ............................................................ 6-4 Table 6-3 Specifications of the optical module at client side of the LWF ........................................ 6-5 Table 6-4 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LWF/LWFS.......... 6-6 Table 6-5 Specifications of the optical module at DWDM side of the LRF or LRFS .................... 6-11 Table 6-6 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the LBE/LBES ............. 6-16 Table 6-7 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LBE/LBES ......... 6-17 Table 6-8 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the TMX....................... 6-21 Table 6-9 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the TMX/TMXS ...... 6-22 Table 6-10 Optical interface parameter specifications of the TMR/TMRS .................................... 6-27 Table 6-11 Optical interface parameter specifications at client side of the LWC1 ......................... 6-32 Table 6-12 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LWC1............... 6-33

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

xiii

Tables

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Table 6-13 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the TRC1................ 6-38 Table 6-14 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the LWM .................... 6-42 Table 6-15 Optical interface parameter specifications at DWDM side of the LWM...................... 6-43 Table 6-16 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module at DWDM side of the LWMR ..... 6-47 Table 6-17 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the LWX..................... 6-51 Table 6-18 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LWX................. 6-52 Table 6-19 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module at DWDM side of the LWXR ...... 6-57 Table 6-20 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the LDG/FDG ............ 6-62 Table 6-21 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LDG/FDG ........ 6-63 Table 6-22 Optical interface parameter at the client side of the LOG and LOGS .......................... 6-67 Table 6-23 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LOG/LOGS...... 6-68 Table 7-1 Parameter specifications of FIU-01 (C+L+1510)........................................................... 7-28 Table 7-2 Parameter specifications of FIU-02 (C+L+1510+1625)................................................. 7-29 Table 7-3 Parameter specifications of FIU-03/06 (C+1510) .......................................................... 7-30 Table 7-4 Parameter specifications of FIU-04 (L+1625)................................................................ 7-30 Table 8-1 Parameters of OAU-LG for L-band.................................................................................. 8-6 Table 8-2 Parameters of OAUC01 for C band.................................................................................. 8-8 Table 8-3 Parameters of OAU-C03E for C band .............................................................................. 8-9 Table 8-4 Parameters of OAUC05 for C band................................................................................ 8-10 Table 8-5 Parameters of OBU-L for L-band (for E2OBU) ............................................................. 8-14 Table 8-6 Parameters of OBUC03 and OBUC05 ........................................................................... 8-15 Table 9-1 Parameter specifications of GFU01 and GFU02 (used with E2OAU) ........................... 9-22 Table 9-2 Parameter specifications of GFU03 (used with raman amplifier) .................................. 9-22 Table 9-3 Parameter specifications of GFU04 (used with ROP amplifier)..................................... 9-23 Table A-1 Cabinet indicators ........................................................................................................... A-1 Table A-2 Red alarm indicator ......................................................................................................... A-2 Table A-3 Green running indicator .................................................................................................. A-2 Table A-4 Green running Indicator on the SCC............................................................................... A-2 Table A-5 Orange indicator.............................................................................................................. A-3 Table B-1 OptiX BWS 1600G equipment board information ......................................................... B-1

xiv

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document


Purpose
This document describes the hardware architecture and composition of the equipment, including boards, cables, interfaces, as well as their functions and parameters.

Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are: Policy planner Installation and commissioning engineer NM configuration engineer Technical support engineer Operation engineer Field engineer

Organisation
This document consists of following chapters and is organised as follows.
Chapter Description

Chapter 1 Cabinet Chapter 2 Power Box

This chapter describes the mechanical structure and technical specifications of the cabinet. This chapter describes the function and technical specifications of the power box; and introduces the switches and interfaces on the front panel of the power box. This chapter describes the mechanical structure, technical specifications, and interfaces of the subrack.

Chapter 3 Subrack

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

About This Document Chapter Description

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Chapter 4 DCM Frame and HUB Frame

This chapter describes the working principle, function, and application of the DCM module. This chapter describes the structure of the DCM Frame and the HUB Frame.

Chapter 5 Overview of This chapter describes the classification and appearance of Boards boards. Chapter 6 Optical Transponder Unit Chapter 7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add/Drop Unit Chapter 8 Optical Amplifier Unit Chapter 9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units Chapter 10 Optical Fiber Automatic Monitoring Units Chapter 11 Protection Units Chapter 12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit Appendix A Appendix D This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical transponder units. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical multiplexers, optical demultiplexers, and optical add/drop multiplexers. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical amplifier units. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of performance detection and adjustment units. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical fiber automatic monitoring units. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of protection units. This chapter describes the function and the working principle of optical supervisory units and system control and communication units. This chapter includes four appendices: Indicators Power Consumption and Weight of Boards Glossary Acronyms and Abbreviations The appendices provide a quick search approach to useful information.

ii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

About This Document

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
Symbol Description

Warning Warning Warning Caution Caution Important Note Note

A warning notice with this symbol indicates high voltage could result in harm to person. A warning notice with this symbol indicates strong laser beam could result in personal injury. A warning notice with this symbol indicates a risk of personal injury. A caution notice with this symbol indicates a risk to equipment damage or loss of data. A caution notice with this symbol indicates the equipment is static-sensitive. An important note notice with this symbol helps you avoid an undesirable situation or indicates important supplementary information. A note notice with this symbol indicates additional, helpful, non-critical information.

General Conventions
Convention Description

Boldface Italic Courier New

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Terminal display is in Courier New.

Diagram Conventions
Convention Description

Indicates the flow of optical signals. Indicates the flow of electrical signals.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

iii

About This Document Convention Description

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Indicates an optical module. Indicates an electrical module. All modules of a board are inside such a block in bold.

Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to the previous versions.

Updates in Document Version T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32


Some bugs in version 1.31 are fixed. The specifications of the boards have been updated. The description of the AP8, AS8, OCU, OCUS, LQS and RPL have been deleted.

Updates in Document Version T2-042580-20060115-C-1.31


Some bugs in version 1.30 are fixed.

Updates in Document Version T2-042580-20051210-C-1.30


The descriptions of the FDG, LOG, LOGS and DWC boards in this version are added.

iv

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Documentation Set Guide

Documentation Set Guide


Documentation Set
This document provides a documentation map to guide you through the documentation set supplied with your OptiX BWS 1600G equipment or T2000 software package. The document can be used as the starting point for reading your user documentation. For the details of the T2000, see the documentation set for the T2000, including printed documents, online help or CD-ROM.
Documentation for OptiX BWS 1600G Installation Guide Commissioning Guide Configuration Guide Routine Maintenance Troubleshooting Quick Reference Guide Technical Description Hardware Description Alarms and Performance Events Reference Compliance and Safety Manual Documentation for OptiX iManager T2000 Installation Guide High Availability System Installation Guide Administrator Guide Operator Guide for WDM T2000-LCT User Guide System Description for WDM Online Help Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide

Documentation for OptiX BWS 1600G


This document package contains documents that introduce the theory, functionality, features, and specifications of the product. In addition, these documents provide procedure guides for project planning, hardware installation, commissioning, service configuration, routine maintenance, and troubleshooting.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Documentation Set Guide

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

The following list provides the short introduction to each document that is supplied with your package. Installation Guide This document provides guides to install the hardware. This document describes the hardware installation procedure, cable routing and related installation specifications for the equipment. Commissioning Guide This document provides guides to practice the commissioning and testing operations after hardware installation. This document describes the preparation, methods and procedures for the station commissioning and the network commissioning. Configuration Guide This document provides guides to configure the services on the T2000 after network commissioning is complete. This document describes how to configure optical network element, service protection, IPA, APE and ALC. Routine Maintenance This document provides guides to practice routine maintenance. This document describes the detailed routine maintenance activities and precautions, including hardware maintenance items and equipment maintenance items on the T2000. Troubleshooting This document provides guides to operate the troubleshooting. This document describes the basic thoughts and operations of troubleshooting. In this document, procedures detailing board replacing methods are included. Quick Reference Guide This document provides guides for field engineers to conduct on-site maintenance. This document describes basic operational and maintenance information covering the majority of day to day activities that will be carried out at a network element. Technical Description This document describes the functions, features, specifications and network application of the equipment. This document provides both introductory information and detailed interface parameters. Hardware Description This document describes hardware architecture and composition of the equipment, including boards, cables, interfaces, as well as their functions and parameters.

vi

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Documentation Set Guide

Alarms and Performance Events Reference This document lists alarms and performance events generated by the equipment. It also provides ways of handling alarms and performance events to clear the faults or failures. Compliance and Safety Manual The Compliance and Safety Manual provides compliance and safety information.

Documentation for OptiX iManager T2000


This document package contains procedure guides for T2000 installation, operation, and equipment maintenance through T2000. Installation Guide This document provides guides to install the T2000 software system. This document describes the installation procedure of database, client and server of the T2000 software system. High Availability System Installation Guide This document provides guides to install, to operate and maintain the High Availability System. Detailed procedures, normal operations, and common faults are given. Three types of user documents are available for the Sun Cluster, Watchman, Veritas depending on the requirement of project. Administrator Guide This document provides guides to manage and maintain the T2000. Normal operations and common faults are given. Operator Guide for WDM This document provides guides to monitor, configure, maintain, and manage a piece of equipment through the T2000. T2000-LCT User Guide This document is shipped with the OptiX iManager T2000-LCT. This document provides guides to install the T2000-LCT, to manage and maintain a piece of equipment through the T2000-LCT. System Description for WDM This document describes the position, functional characteristics, system architecture and networking mode of the T2000, appended with standards that the T2000 complies with, abbreviations and performance indexes.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

vii

Documentation Set Guide

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Online Help This document provides guides to use the T2000. This document describes the functionality, menu and interface parameters of the T2000 and how to monitor, configure, maintain and manage a piece of equipment through the T2000. Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide This document provides guides to use the T2000CORBA interface. Functions, features, installation and maintenance information are given.

Use Phases
See the following table to use desired documents according to the phases and user profiles.
Document Name Intended Audience Planning Installation & Commissioning Configuration Maintenance

Installation Guide Commissioning Guide T2000 Installation Guide Note 1 T2000 HA System Installation Guide Note 1 Note 2 Configuration Guide T2000 Operation Guide for WDM Note 1 T2000- LCT User Guide Note 1 T2000 On-line Help Note 1 Note 3 Quick Reference Guide Routine Maintenance Troubleshooting Alarms and Performance Events Reference Technical Description Hardware Description T2000 System Description for WDMNote 1

I&C, T&S P P P P

I&C I&C, T&S I&C, T&S I&C I&C I&C I&C I&C

NM-R NM-C NM-C NM-C, T&S NM-C, T&S NM-C, T&S NM-C, T&S NM-C NM-C NM-C, O

F, I&C F, I&C NM-R NM-R, T&S, O NM-R, T&S, O NM-R, T&S, O F NM-R, F, T&S, O NM-R, T&S, O NM-R, T&S, O T&S T&S, O, F T&S

viii

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Document Name Intended Audience Planning Installation & Commissioning

Documentation Set Guide

Configuration

Maintenance

Compliance and Safety Manual F: Field engineer O: Operation engineer T&S: Technical support engineer B: Build and acceptance engineer

T&S P: Policy planning

T&S

I&C: Installation and commissioning engineer NM-R: NM real time engineer NM-C: NM configuration engineer

Note 1: These documents are for NM and should be delivered with the NM software. Note 2: The Optical iManager T2000 HA System User Guide should be delivered with the user documentation of the Sun Cluster, Watchman or Veritas depending on the project. Note 3: The OptiX iManager T2000 on-line help is integrated in the system, providing comprehensive operation guide.

Version Control
The documentation version is displayed as:
T2 - 04XXXX - yyyymmdd - C - 1.10
Doc. version Confidentiality level Publishing date Internal code Code for transmission English version

If the version is updated, then the last Doc. version 1.10 will be changed to 1.11, and the Publishing date will be updated.

Safety Information
For safety and warning information, see OptiX BWS 1600G Backbone DWDM Optical Transmission System Compliance and Safety Manual shipped with the product. This document lists EMC and other safety standards that the OptiX BWS 1600G complies with, and provides safety precautions that should be followed during the installation and maintenance of the OptiX BWS 1600G.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

ix

Documentation Set Guide

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Distribution
The documentation set for the OptiX BWS 1600G is shipped with the hardware product, in printed and CD-ROM. The documentation set for the NM is shipped with the OptiX iManager T2000, including printed document, online help and CD-ROM.

Feedback on Documentation
Your suggestions and comments are welcome. Please email us at support@huawei.com.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

1 Cabinet

1
Cabinet Subrack Power box Fan tray assembly (including air filter) Dispersion compensation module (DCM) frame HUB frame

Cabinet

An OptiX BWS 1600G Backbone DWDM Optical Transmission System (hereinafter called the OptiX BWS 1600G for short) comprises:

See Figure 1-1. A cabinet can hold subracks with different board combinations to form diverse types of the OptiX BWS 1600G.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1-1

1 Cabinet

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Figure 1-1 Appearance of an OptiX BWS 1600G

1.1 Structure
An OptiX BWS 1600G system adopts an ETS300-119-3 standard cabinet. Hence, the system is rational in cabinet structure and graceful in appearance. The main frame of the cabinet is a rack, with a rear panel fixed at the back and movable side panels at both sides. The power box is mounted at the top. The subracks are installed in the middle of the cabinet. For the exploded view of a cabinet of an OptiX BWS 1600G, see Figure 1-2. The cabinet features the following: The cabinet has a front door. The cabinet leaves much space for routing and managing optical fibres and cables. Two movable side panels are installed at both sides of the cabinet. Each side panel can move in or move out along a slide rail on the top and the bottom of the cabinet. Air vents are provided at the front door of the subrack, the rear panel and upper enclosure frame of the cabinet to ensure heat dissipation.

1-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

1 Cabinet

Power box Rear panel

Subrack

Column

DCM and HUB frames Side panel

Front door

Figure 1-2 Exploded view of an OptiX BWS 1600G cabinet

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1-3

1 Cabinet

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

1.2 Capacity
The rational cabinet structure makes the OptiX BWS 1600G highly integrated. For the full configuration of the 300 mm ETSI cabinets of various heights, refer to Table 1-1. If the cabinet is not fully configured, the subracks are installed from bottom to top.
Table 1-1 Full configuration of the 300 mm ETSI cabinets of various heights
Height of the cabinet Quantity of power boxes Quantity of subracks Quantity of DCM frames Quantity of HUB frames

1.8 m 2.0 m 2.2 m 2.6 m

1 1 1 1

2 2 3 3

1 1 1 2

1 1 1 1

1.3 Parameters
There are four types of cabinets with different heights. Type 1 and type 2 can hold up to 3 subracks. . And type 3 and type 4 can hold up to 2 subracks. Cabinet dimensions and weight:
Table 1-2 Dimensions and weight of the OptiX BWS 1600G cabinet
Cabinet Height (mm) Width (mm) Depth (mm) Weight (kg)

Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4

2,200 2,600 1800 2000

600 600 600 600

300 300 300 300

69 78 58 64

Working power supply: 38.4 V to 57.6 V DC (48 V nominal), or 48.0 V to 72.0 V DC (60 V nominal) Maximum power consumption of a type 1 or a type 2 cabinet (full configuration with 3 subracks): 2000 W Maximum power consumption of a type 3 or a type 4 cabinet (full configuration with 2 subracks): 1300 W

1-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

2 Power Box

2
2.1 Functions

Power Box

A power box for an OptiX BWS 1600G is mounted at the top of a cabinet. The power box provides standard 48 V DC or 60 V DC to the cabinet. It is a closed structure with all user interfaces placed on its front panel. A pluggable lightning protection device is adopted, easy for operation and maintenance.

A power box is mainly used to access two independent 48 V DC inputs or two independent 60 V DC inputs. It distributes reliable power supply to the units of the equipment. For the function of each unit in a power box, refer to Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Functions of the units in a power box
Unit Abbreviation Function

Power distribution unit Power monitoring unit

PDU

Provides power distribution. Protects the system from lightning.

PMU

Generates ringing current. Monitors ringing current, 48 V/60 V DC voltage and temperature in the power box. Accesses 16 external alarms and output 4 channels of alarms. Provides low-voltage protection. Controls cabinet indicators and SCC communication.

Power monitoring connection board Power output switch

PMC

Supplies working voltage to the PMU. Provides two lines of testing voltages. A magnetic circuit breaker used to control the matched power outputs. Refer to Table 2-3 for details.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-1

2 Power Box

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

A PMU board is the main part of a power box. The board has the following functions: Generating ringing current Provides ringing current for orderwire. Monitoring ringing current Test whether the ringing current for orderwire is normal, and reports the alarm information such as invalid ringing current. Monitoring voltage A PMU monitors the input voltage of two 48 V/60 V power. The PMU also reports the voltage value and voltage alarms. The alarms include over- and under-voltage alarms. For an alarming threshold, you may take the default value in the system, or set a value according to your requirement. In different application environment, the voltage alarming thresholds can be set as: Over-voltage threshold: 60 V 1 V for nominal 48 V DC, or 71 V 1 V for nominal 60 V DC. Under-voltage threshold: 41 1 V for nominal 48 V DC, or 51 V 1V for nominal 60 V DC. Monitoring temperature A temperature sensor in the power box monitors the temperature. Note that the sensor measures the ambient temperature inside the power box, not that of the subracks or boards. Monitoring alarms One PMU can monitor 16 external alarm inputs and 4 equipment alarms. The PMU outputs the alarms occurred and supervises the external environment.

2.2 Panel Description


For the front view of a power box, see Figure 2-1.
3 4
2 0A

6
20 A 20A 2A 20A 20A 20 A 2A

10 11

RTN(+) NEG(-)

RTN(+) NEG(-)

OUT1

O UT2

OUT3

AUX

O UT1

OU T2

OUT3

AUX

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

O FF

O FF

OFF

O FF

ALARM SERIAL
TEST

RUN PO W ER IN AL M SW 1 SW 2 SW 3

RUN POW ER IN ALM SW 1 SW 2 SW 3

RUN AL M

MU TE

PMU PDU

PDU

12

Figure 2-1 Front view of a power box

2-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

2 Power Box

For the functions of each item in Figure 2-1, refer to Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Description of the power panel
Marking Function unit Function

1 2 3 4 5

Power distribution unit (PDU) RUN and ALM indicators on PDU Protection grounding screws

Provides power distribution and protects the system from lightning. Serves as the running indicator and the alarm indicator of the PDU. Leads in the PGND cable.

Input cable terminals Leads in 48V/60V power cables and BGND cables. Three power distribution switches SW1 Controls power supply of the upper subrack. The output port of SW 1 is OUT1 Control power supply of the middle subrack. The output port of SW 2 is OUT2 Control power supply of the lower subrack. The output port of SW 3 is OUT3

SW2

SW3

6 7

Output cable terminal TEST switch

Leads in the power cables connected to the subracks (20A), HUB (2A) and COA (2A). Serves for audio/visual alarm test. Usually, the switch is in the lower state. When the switch is in the upper state, the green, yellow and red indicators on the cabinet top flash, and a buzzer buzzes. If so, the alarm system is normal. Serves for muting the audio alarm. When the switch is in down position, the audio alarm is shut down completely. When there is a critical alarm, no audio alarm is given off. Normally, this switch is required to be in up position. Serves as the interface for alarm input, alarm output and alarm cascade. Serves as the interface for subrack communication. Serves as the power monitoring unit. Serves as the running indicator and the alarm indicator of the PMU.

MUTE switch

9 10 11 12

ALARM interface SERIAL interface PMU RUN and ALM indicators on PMU

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-3

2 Power Box

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

2.3 DIP Switches


For the DIP switches on a PMU board, see Figure 2-2.
ON ON ON ON

Figure 2-2 PMU DIP switches

Below lists the function of each DIP switch. DIP switch 1 and DIP switch 2 are used to set communication with a certain subrack. The settings of the two switches decide which subrack the PMU communicates with. The default setting is that the PMU communicates with the lower subrack. The PMU reports information such as environment variables and voltage to the SCC of the subrack. The SCC further reports the information to the T2000. For the settings and meanings of DIP switches, see Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 Settings and meanings of DIP switches
DIP switch 1 DIP switch 2 PMU communicates with

ON ON OFF OFF

ON OFF ON OFF

Upper subrack Middle subrack Lower subrack No communication

Note The DIP switch is ON when in up position, and OFF when in down position.

DIP switch 3 is used to control the cabinet indicators. The DIP switch 3 needs to work with the related hosts. By default, the switch is set to ON (in up position). In some special zones, the DIP switch is set to OFF (in down position). DIP switch 4 is used to set the power system used. When the DIP switch 4 is OFF, the working voltage is 48 V DC. When the switch is ON, the working voltage is 60 V DC. The default state is OFF.

2-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

2 Power Box

2.4 Interface Description


The PMU in the power box fulfils alarm output, input and cascade functions. In the PMU, ALARM is an interface for the external alarms, while SERIAL for the internal alarms.

2.4.1 SERIAL Interface


A SERIAL is a communication interface between the PMU and the subrack in the cabinet. The SERIAL is also an interface for driving signal of the cabinet indicator. For the cables between a SERIAL interface and the subracks, see Figure 2-3. Cable W1 is connected with the upper subrack, W2 with the middle subrack and W3 with the lower subrack. W4 is a cable for driving green, red and orange indicators at the cabinet top.

Figure 2-3 Alarm cables between a SERIAL interface and the subracks

There are two types of alarms in a cabinet of the transmission equipment: Visual alarm: including red indicator alarm (critical) and yellow indicator alarm (major). Audio alarm: given off by a buzzer. Audio alarm is triggered by critical alarms. When the SCC board gives out a critical alarm signal, the red indicator flashes and the buzzer buzzes. The MUTE switch at the cabinet top or the ALC switch of the SCC board controls the buzz sound.

2.4.2 ALARM Interface


The transmission equipment outputs the alarm signal of the cabinet to the centralised alarming system. The power box provides four alarm outputs, one for major alarm, one for critical alarm, and the other two for auxiliary Boolean value. If the centralised alarming system is in audio alarm mode, the alarm mute function is required.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-5

2 Power Box

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

The alarm signal is led out from the ALARM interface of the PMU. For the diagram of pins (DB50) of an ALARM interface, see Figure 2-4. For the assignment of the pins, see Table 2-4. For the usage of the pins, see Table 2-5.

26

Figure 2-4 ALARM pins diagram

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

2-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

2 Power Box

Table 2-4 ALARM interface pin assignment


PIN No. Definition PIN No. Definition

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 26 28 30 32 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 27, 29, 31, 33

RELAY1 RELAY2 RELAY3 RELAY4 RELAY5 RELAY6 RELAY7 RELAY8 RELAY9 RELAY10 RELAY11 RELAY12 RELAY13 RELAY14 RELAY15 RELAY16 GND

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 25, 50

ALMOUT1 ALMOUT1 ALMOUT2 ALMOUT2 ALMOUT3 ALMOUT3 ALMOUT4 ALMOUT4 ALMOUT5 ALMOUT5 ALMOUT6 ALMOUT6 ALMOUT7 ALMOUT7 ALMOUT8 ALMOUT8 Undefined

Note Each pin with a RELAY code is in pair with a GND cable that has a PIN code larger by 1.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-7

2 Power Box

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Table 2-5 ALARM interface pin assignment


Pin name Usage

ALMOUT1 and ALMOUT2 ALMOUT3 and ALMOUT4 ALMOUT5 and ALMOUT6 ALMOUT7 and ALMOUT8 RELAY1-16

Major alarm Boolean output Critical alarm Boolean output Output of auxiliary alarm Boolean 1 Output of auxiliary alarm Boolean 2 Input of external 16 channels of Boolean

Note When an alarm occurs, two alarm values are output at the same time, one to the W2 interface, the other to the W3 interface, as shown in Figure 2-5, so as to cascade the alarm signals.

If several cabinets are installed side by side, the alarms of these cabinets can be cascaded. One end of externally connected alarm cable contains a DB50 connector, while the other end has three branches. These three branches contain two alarm output/alarm cascade connectors (DB9) and one external alarm input connector (DB37) See Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-5 Alarm cable

In Figure 2-5, W2 and W3 are alarm output/cascade cables, W1 is the alarm input cable. The alarm signals are cascaded among cabinets through W2 and W3. The last cabinet transmits the signals to the centralised alarming system.

2-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

2 Power Box

Caution As an alarm output or cascade interface is a DB9 male connector, a 3-m cable with DB9 female connectors on both ends is needed to cascade the alarm signals of two cabinets.

The power box provides 16 input interfaces for external alarms. The alarm input function is intended for remote monitoring of the alarms from an external system (such as an environment monitoring system). You may name the 16 inputs of alarms for easy remote monitoring. External alarm input includes door access, smoke and other environmental factors. In other words, the external alarm input accesses the environmental alarms in the equipment room for centralised monitoring. Before displaying an external alarm on the T2000 server, you may process the alarm with software program to determine whether the alarm is valid. W1 is an external alarm input connector, also a DB37 female connector. A 10-m alarm input cable (DB37 connector on one end and the other end reserved) is connected to the W1 cable to allow external alarm input.

Caution The transmission system cannot monitor the external alarms independently. The system must co-work with an external environment monitoring system of the customer.

2.5 Technical Parameters


Table 2-6 Technical parameters of the power box
Item Technical parameters of the power box

Dimensions Input rated current Weight

100 mm (H) 400 mm (W) 258 mm (D) 65 A 9 kg

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2-9

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

3 Subrack

3
3.1 Structure
A subrack of an OptiX BWS 1600G comprises three parts: For the structure of the subrack, see Figure 3-1.

Subrack

Upper part: an interface area that accesses all kinds of electrical signals. Middle part: a board area. Lower part: a fibre cabling area and a fan area.

1 2

1. Interface area 5. Fibre laying area

2. Beam 6. Fan tray assembly

3. Board area 7. Subrack front door

4. Fibre spool 8. Hook

Figure 3-1 OptiX BWS 1600G subrack structure diagram

Interface area

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

3-1

3 Subrack

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

All external interfaces are located in this area, including the interfaces for subrack power supply, NM and orderwire telephone, and so on. The interface area also works as a heat dissipation outlet of the subrack. The orderwire telephone can be installed under the beam in this area. Board area Totally 13 slots are available, numbered IU1, IU2, IU3 IU13 from left to right when you face the front surface of the subrack. Slot IU7 is for SCC or SCE board and is 24-mm wide. Other slots are 38-mm wide. All optical interfaces are located on these standard G-type front panels. Most optical interfaces are of LC/PC type, while the LINE, EXT and OUT optical interfaces on the front panel of the Raman amplifier unit are of E2000/APC type. Fibre cabling area All the optical fibres from the optical interfaces are routed to this area. These optical fibres then come out of this area and reach the matched side of the subrack. There are fibre spools at the two sides of the subrack. These spools allow good management over the optical fibres. Mechanical variable optical attenuator (VOA) is installed here. Fan tray assembly This area contains a fan tray and an air filter. The air filter is fixed beneath the fan tray . The fans and air filter ensure a dust-free environment with normal temperature. Front door The front door is intended for equipment protection and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC). The inner side of the front door is equipped with hooks to hold the screws for adjusting the mechanical VOA. Backplane The backplane is located at the back of the subrack. The system depends on the service bus of the backplane to connect all modules. This enables the system to fulfill functions of data bus, clock bus, communication bus, overhead bus and some control buses. Fibre spools The fibre spools serve to coil the slack of the optical fibre.

3-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

3 Subrack

3.2 Interface Area


For the subrack interface area of an OptiX BWS 1600G, see Figure 3-2.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

ETHERNET1 ETHERNET1

CLKIN

CLKOUT OCU CLKIN

3 PHONE1 PHONE2

6
F&f Serial 1 Serial 2 ALM F1 OAM POWER1 POWER2

PHONE3

14

1. ETHERNET1 6. F& f 11. OAM

2. ETHERNET2 7. Serial1 12. POWER1

3.CLKIN 8. Serial2 13. POWER2

4. CLKOUT 9. ALM 14. PHONE

5. OCU CLKIN 10. F1

Figure 3-2 The subrack interface area

ETHERNET1 interface (RJ45 connector): serves as the TMN interface and local NE management interface. ETHERNET2 interface (RJ45 connector): serves as the internal communication interface for functions among subracks, such as Automatic Level Control (ALC) and Automatic Power Equilibrium (APE).

Note The two ETHERNET interfaces in the subrack interface area serve for communication between SCCs. But the communication contents of the two interfaces are different. (1) The ETHERNET1 interface serves for extended ECC function. That is, the ETHERNET1 interfaces of all subracks in an OTM, OLA or OADM are connected to the HUB through straight-through network cables to communicate with the T2000 server. (2) The ETHERNET2 interface serves for special network functions among subracks. The boards with such functions as ALC and APE may not belong to the same subrack. The boards communicate through internal protocols. Hence, the ETHERNET2 interface of each subrack are connected through a straight-through network cable (if only two subracks are involved) or connected to another HUB, to communicate among subracks. (3) ETHERNET 1 and ETHERNET 2 are non-interchangeable.

CLKIN 13 interfaces (SMB sockets)

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

3-3

3 Subrack

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

CLKIN 13 interfaces offer three external clock input interfaces. CLKOUT 16 interfaces (SMB sockets) CLKOUT 16 interfaces offer six network clock output interfaces. OCU CLKIN interfaces (SMB sockets) OCU CLKIN interfaces offer two external clock source interfaces to the OCU board. These two clock interfaces are connected internally and only one external clock can be accessed. F&f interface (DB9 connector) An F&f interface has all the features of RS-232 interface. The F&f only serves as an interface for software internal testing. Serial 1 & serial 2 interfaces (DB9 connector) Serial 1 & serial 2 interfaces enjoy the features of both RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces. Serial 1 uses F2 byte and serial 2 uses F3 byte. The maximum throughput is 19200 bit/s. ALM interface (DB9 connector) An ALM interface serves for subrack alarms output The ALM communicates with the PMU board located in the power box. The ALM is connected with the subrack communication interface (SERIAL) on the power box panel. F1 interface (DB9 connector) An F1 interface serves as a 64 kbit/s codirectional data interface. OAM interface (DB9 connector) An OAM interface serves as a local NE management interface. POWER1 and POWER2 (plug-in connectors) POWER1 and POWER2 interfaces provide two subrack power supply input interfaces, backup to each other. PHONE1-3 (RJ-45 connectors) PHONE1-3 interfaces are orderwire phone interfaces that use the OSC bytes E1 and E2.

3-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

3 Subrack

3.3 Fan Tray Assembly


Each subrack contains a fan tray assembly that consists of a fan tray and an air filter. The air filter can be extracted directly for cleaning. The fan tray and the air filter are installed at the lower part of the subrack, located under the fibre laying area. The air filter is hung under the fan tray and the two parts form as a whole. See Figure 3-3.

1 6

2 3 4 5
2. Air filter 5. Alarm indicator 3. Pulled handle 6. Connector

1. Fans (six in total) 4. Fan running indicators (six in total)

Figure 3-3 Fan tray assembly

The fan tray assembly is directly inserted to the backplane through connectors. The backplane provides 48 V/60 V DC for the fan tray assembly. There are six green indicators on the front panel of the fan tray assembly. These indicators show the running statuses of the six fans. Because of abundant optical devices and large power consumption, the cooling and ventilation system of an OptiX BWS 1600G is critical. For the air circulation of the entire subrack, see Figure 3-4. The air inlet is located in the lower part of the subrack, while the air outlet is located in the subrack interface area. Such a design forms a good cooling and ventilation system and allows the normal running of the equipment.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

3-5

3 Subrack

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Interface area

Air outlet

Board area

Optical fiber laying area Fan tray assembly Air inlet

The dotted line shows the airflow path and the direction of the airflow.

Figure 3-4 Air circulation in the OptiX BWS 1600G subrack

3.4 Parameters
Dimensions and weight:
Table 3-1 Dimensions and weight of an OptiX BWS 1600G subrack
Subrack Parameters Height (mm) Width (mm) Depth (mm) Weight (kg)

625

495

291

18 (empty subrack)

Maximum power consumption (in full configuration): 650W

3-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

4 DCM Frame and HUB Frame

4
4.1.1 Working Principle

DCM Frame and HUB Frame

4.1 Dispersion Compensation Module (DCM)


A G.652 or a G.655 fiber has positive dispersion coefficient and positive dispersion slope at 1550-nm window. After the optical signal is transmitted over a certain distance, the accumulation of positive dispersion widens the optical signal pulse. This seriously affects the system transmission performance. To minimize such an effect, a passive DCM is used in the network. A DCM uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion of a transmitting fiber, so as to keep the original shape of the signal pulse.

4.1.2 Functions
The OptiX BWS 1600G system provides various DCMs for C-band and L-band. Refer to the table below Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 DCM type
Band Applicable for DCMs

C-band C-band L-band

G.652 fiber G.655 fiber G.652 fiber

DCM (5), DCM (20), DCM (40), DCM (60), DCM (80), and DCM (100) DCM (20), DCM (40), DCM (60), DCM (80), and DCM (100) DCM (20), DCM (40), DCM (60), and DCM (80)

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-1

4 DCM Frame and HUB Frame

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Note The numbers in the above brackets refer to the typical dispersion compensation distance (in km) of the DCM.

4.1.3 Application
The dispersion coefficient of a G.652 fiber is large, while that of a G.655 fiber is small. A DCM can be installed on an optical amplifier unit at the transmit end or receive end according to the actual situation.

Note The OptiX BWS 1600G-V system is a pure 2.5 Gbit/s system. Because the dispersion tolerance is large, DCM is not required.

4.1.4 Parameters
Table 4-2 Dimensions and weight of a DCM
Module Dimensions Weight

DCM

44 mm (H) x 238 mm (W) x 266 mm (D)

3.5 kg

4.2 DCM Frame


A DCM frame is mounted on the lowest part of the cabinet with mounting brackets and screws. See Figure 4-1. At most, two DCMs can be placed into one DCM frame. For the dimensions and weight of a DCM frame, refer to Table 4-3.

4-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

4 DCM Frame and HUB Frame

1 2 3 4
1. DCM frame 2. Case 3. DCM
D H W

5
4. HUB tray 5. HUB

Figure 4-1 DCM and HUB frames in an OptiX BWS 1600G cabinet Table 4-3 Dimensions and weight of a DCM frame
Module Dimensions

DCM frame

48 mm (H) x 282 mm (D) x 530 mm (W)

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

4-3

4 DCM Frame and HUB Frame

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

4.3 HUB Frame


A HUB is required in a station with multiple subracks. The HUB ports connect with the network ports in interface area of every subrack through network cables. This realizes the communications between subracks, as well as the expanded ECC function. A HUB is powered by a power box on the top of a cabinet where the HUB and power box locate. A HUB is located in a HUB frame that is in the lowest position of the cabinet. The HUB frame is right under the DCM frame. See Figure 4-1. A HUB frame comprises two parts: a box body and a HUB tray. The box body is attached to the cabinet with mounting brackets and screws. The HUB tray is removable, easy for daily use and maintenance. For the dimensions of a HUB frame, refer to Table 4-4.
Table 4-4 Dimensions of a HUB frame
Module Dimensions

HUB frame

43 mm (H) x 255 mm (D) x 434 mm (W)

Caution During a routine maintenance, if the HUB tray is required to be extracted, turn the front door outward first. See Figure 4-1.

4-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

5 Overview of Boards

5
5.1 Board Category

Overview of Boards

The OptiX BWS 1600G system has the following board categories: Optical transponder unit Optical multiplexing, demultiplexing, add/drop multiplexing unit Optical amplifier unit Performance detection and adjustment unit Optical fibre automatic monitoring unit Protection unit Optical supervisory channel unit System control & communication unit

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-1

5 Overview of Boards

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Table 5-1 Board list


Board category Board name Board description

Optical transponder unit

(E2) LWF (Note 1) (E2) LWFS LRF LRFS LBE LBES (E3) LWF (E3) LWFS TMR TMRS TMX TMXS LWC1 TRC1 LWM LWMR LWX LWXR LDG FDG LOG

STM-64 transmit-receive line wavelength conversion unit with FEC function STM-64 transmit-receive line wavelength conversion unit with FEC function (Super WDM) STM-64 line regenerating wavelength conversion unit with FEC function STM-64 line regenerating wavelength conversion unit with FEC function( Super WDM) Transmit-receive line wavelength conversion board for 10GE (LAN) Transmit-receive line wavelength conversion board for 10GE (LAN) (Super WDM) STM-64 transmit-receive line wavelength conversion unit with AFEC function STM-64 transmit-receive line wavelength conversion unit with AFEC function (Super WDM) 10.71G line regenerating wavelength conversion board with AFEC and G.709 10.71G line regenerating wavelength conversion board with AFEC and G.709 (Super WDM) 4-channel STM-16 asynchronous MUX OTU-2 wavelength conversion board 4-channel STM-16 asynchronous MUX OTU-2 wavelength conversion board (Super WDM) STM-16 line wavelength conversion unit (compliant with G.709) STM-16 optical transmitting regenerator (compliant with G.709) Multi-rate optical wavelength conversion board Multi-rate optical wavelength conversion relay board Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit Arbitrary bit rate regenerating board 2 Gigabit Ethernet unit 2-port Gigabit Ethernet Wavelength Conversion Board With FEC 8-port Gigabit Ethernet multiplex optical wavelength conversion board

5-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Board category Board name Board description

5 Overview of Boards

LOGS Optical multiplexing/ demultiplexing unit or optical add/drop multiplexing unit M40 D40 V40 MR2 DWC ITL FIU Optical amplifier unit OAU OBU OPU HBA RPC RPA ROP Performance detection and adjustment unit MCA VA4 VOA DGE DSE GFU Optical fibre automatic monitoring unit FMU MWA MWF Protection unit OLP OCP SCS PBU Optical supervisory SC1

8-port Gigabit Ethernet multiplex optical wavelength conversion board (Super WDM) 40-channel multiplexing unit 40-channel demultiplexing unit 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA 2-channel optical add/drop unit Dynamic Wavelength Control Unit Interleaver unit Fibre interface unit Optical amplifier unit Optical booster board Optical preamplifier board High-power optical booster amplifier board Raman pump amplifier unit for c-band Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band and L-band Remote Optical Pump Multi-channel spectrum analyser unit 4-channel variable optical attenuator board Variable optical attenuator unit Dynamic gain equalizer board Dispersion slope equilibrium board Gain flatness unit Fiber measure unit board Measure wavelength access board Measure wavelength filter board Optical line protection unit Optical channel protection board Synchronization optical channel separator unit Power backup board Single Directional Optical Supervising Channel unit

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-3

5 Overview of Boards Board category Board name Board description

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

channel unit

SC2 TC1 TC2

Dual Directional Optical Supervising Channel unit Unidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transporting unit Bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transporting unit System control and communication board System control and communication unit for the extended subrack

System control & SCC communication unit SCE

Note 1: The brackets before the board name shows the hardware version of this board.

5.2 Board Appearance


A board is inserted in the board area of a subrack. See Figure 5-1.
5

2 3

1. Screw

2. Ejector lever

3. Indicator

4. Fiber interface

5. Guide pin

Figure 5-1 Board appearance

Board dimensions: 321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) Front panel dimensions: 345 mm (H) x 114 mm (W) 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W)

5-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

5 Overview of Boards

345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 345 mm (H) x 24 mm (W)

Note The following figure shows the directions of the height, the width, the depth and the thickness. Height (H): frontal dimension Width (W): frontal dimension Depth (D): PCB size dimension Thickness (T): PCB size dimension
H W(T) D

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5-5

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Optical Transponder Unit

This chapter describes the optical transponder units (OTUs) of the OptiX BWS 1600G in terms of: Functionality Working principle Front panel Technical specifications

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-1

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6.1 LWF/LWFS
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the LWF board and the LWFS board. The LWF and the LWFS are the same in function and mechanism, but are different in encoding mode.

6.1.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LWF and the LWFS.
Functionality Description LWF LWFS

Basic function

Accesses STM-64/OC-192 optical signal at the client side. Converts the signal into DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.

Encoding mode

Supports non return to zero (NRZ) encoding.

Supports chirped return to zero (CRZ) encoding. The use of CRZ encoding increases the system tolerance to OSNR and extends the transmission distance.

Tunable wavelength function

Supports tunable wavelength optical module. The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and 196.05 THz, totally 80 wavelengths at an interval of 50 GHz.

FEC function

There are two types of LWF boards: E2LWF that adopts the FEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975. E3LWF that adopts the AFEC encoding compliant with ITU-T G.975.1.

Overhead processing ESC function Alarms and performance events monitoring

Supports protocol overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709. Multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channel for transmission. Monitors B1,B2, SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults. Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on: Laser bias current Laser cooling current Laser working temperature Optical power

ALS function

Provides automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.

6-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Functionality Description LWF LWFS

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Protection schemes

Supports 1:N optical channel protection, inter board 1+1 optical channel protection.

6.1.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-1 shows the principle block diagram of the LWF and the LWFS.
Client side WDM side

STM-64/OC-192

Optical transponder module

G.694.1

Performance and alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-1 Principle block diagram of the LWF and the LWFS

The working principle of the LWF is described as follows. At the client side: The optical transponder module of the LWF receives STM-64/OC-192 signals. It processes and encodes the signals, and outputs ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM signals by its optical transmitter. At the DWDM side: The LWF receives ITU-T G.694.1-compliant optical signals. The optical transponder module then processes the signals, and outputs the original STM-64/OC-192 signals. The encoding and decoding in the above processes comply with ITU-T G.975/G.975.1 and support overhead processing in compliance with ITU-T G.709. The board takes measures for jitter suppression. Also, the board monitors the related performance parameters and alarm signals.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-3

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Table 6-1 Comparison between the E2LWF and E3LWF


Board Supports Regenerated board

E2LWF E3LWF

G.975-compliant FEC G.975.1-compliant AFEC

LRF TMR

Table 6-2 Comparison between the E2LWFS and E3LWFS


Board kind Supports Regenerated board

E2LWFS E3LWFS

G.975-compliant FEC G.975.1-compliant AFEC

LRFS TMRS

6.1.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-2 shows the front panel of the LWF and the LWFS.

LWF

LWFS

RUN ALM

RUN ALM

TX OUT

TX OUT

RX IN IN

RX IN IN

Figure 6-2 Front panel of the LWF and the LWFS

6-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LWF or the LWFS.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWF or the LWFS.
Interface Connector type Description

IN OUT Tx Rx

LC LC LC LC

Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the OADM board to receive DWDM signals. Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM board to transmit DWDM signal. Transmits service signals to the client side. Receives service signals from the client side.

6.1.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LWF and the LWFS.
Table 6-3 Specifications of the optical module at client side of the LWF
Parameters Unit Specifications

Optical interface type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km

I-64.1 NRZ SLM 2

I-64.2 NRZ SLM 25

S-64.2b NRZ SLM 40

Se-64.2a NRZ SLM 40

Le-64.2 NRZ SLM 60

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power nm dBm 12901 330 1 15301 565 1 15301 565 +2 15301 565 +2 15301565 +4

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-5

6 Optical Transponder Unit Parameters Unit Specifications

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum 20 dB spectrum width Minimum side-mode suppression ratio (SMSR) Eye pattern mask

dBm dB nm dB NA

6 6 NA NA

5 +8.2 NA NA

1 +8.2 0.3 30

1 +8.2 0.3 30

+1 +8.2 0.3 30

Compliant with G.691

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance Jitter characteristics nm dBm dBm dB PIN 12001 650 11 1 27 PIN 12001 650 14 1 27 PIN 12001 650 14 1 27 APD 12001 650 21 8 27 APD 12001650 21 8 27

Compliant with G.783

Table 6-4 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LWF/LWFS
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing Line code format

GHz

50 NRZ CRZ

100 NRZ CRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power dBm Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Nominal Central frequency dBm dB THz 0 5 +10 192.10196. 05, 186.95190. 90 Central frequency deviation Maximum 20dB spectral width Minimum SMSR Maximum dispersion GHz nm dB ps/nm 5 0.3 35 800 5 0.56 30 300 to +500 0 5 +13 192.10196. 05 0 5 +10 192.10196. 00, 186.95190. 90 10 0.3 35 800 10 0.64 30 300 to +500 0 5 +13 192.10196. 00

6-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Parameters Unit Specifications

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Eye pattern mask Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB

Compliant with G.691

NA

Compliant with G.691

NA

PIN 12001650 14 1 27

PIN 12001650 16 0 27

PIN 12001650 14 0 27

PIN 12001650 16 0 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LWF and the LWFS.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

E2LWF E2LWFS E3LWF E3LWFS

32.9 W 41.7 W 27.1 W 40.0 W

36.2 W 45.8 W 29.8 W 44.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the LWF or the LWFS.
Item Specification E3LWF, E3LWFS E2LWF E2LWFS

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 1.4 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13 1.6 kg 1.7 kg

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-7

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6.2 LRF/LRFS
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LRF board and the LRFS board.

6.2.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LRF and the LRFS.
Functionality Description LRF LRFS

Basic function

Used in an REG station to regenerate corresponding optical signals. The LRF and the LRFS can regenerate unidirectional optical signals.

Regenerating rate Relative OTU Encoding mode

STM-64 E2LWF Supports NRZ encoding. E2LWFS Supports CRZ encoding. The use of CRZ encoding will increase system tolerance to OSNR and extend the transmission distance.

Tunable wavelength function

Supports tunable wavelength optical module. The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and 196.05 THz, totally 80 wavelengths at an interval of 50 GHz.

FEC function Overhead processing Alarms and performance events monitoring

Adopts the FEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975. Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709. Monitors B1, SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults. Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on: Laser bias current Laser cooling current Laser working temperature Optical power

ALS function

Provides ALS function.

6-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

6.2.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-3 shows the principle block diagram of the LRF and the LRFS.
WDM side WDM side

G.694.1

Regenerating module

G.694.1

Performance and alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-3 Principle block diagram of the LRF and the LRFS

The working principle of the LRF is described as follows. The LRF accesses only one channel of optical signal. The regenerating module reshapes, regenerates and retimes the accessed signal. The module outputs the processed optical signal.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-9

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6.2.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-4 shows the front panel of the LRF and the LRFS.

LRF

LRFS

RUN ALM

RUN ALM

IN OUT

IN OUT

Figure 6-4 Front panel of the LRF and the LRFS

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LRF or the LRFS.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the LRF or the LRFS.

6-10

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Interface Connector type Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

IN OUT

LC LC

Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the OADM board to receive DWDM signals. Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM board to transmit DWDM signal.

6.2.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LRF and the LRFS.
Table 6-5 Specifications of the optical module at DWDM side of the LRF or LRFS
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing Line code format

GHz

50 NRZ CRZ

100 NRZ CRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power dBm Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Nominal Central frequency dBm dB THz 0 5 +10 192.10196. 05, 186.95190. 90 Central frequency deviation Maximum 20dB spectral width Minimum SMSR Maximum dispersion Eye pattern mask Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload nm dBm dBm PIN 12001650 14 1 PIN 12001650 16 0 PIN 12001650 14 0 PIN 12001650 16 0 GHz nm dB ps/nm 5 0.3 35 800 Compliant with G.691 5 0.56 30 300 to +500 NA 0 5 +13 192.10196. 05 0 5 +10 192.10196. 00, 186.95190. 90 10 0.3 35 800 Compliant with G.691 10 0.64 30 300 to +500 NA 0 5 +13 192.10196. 00

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-11

6 Optical Transponder Unit Parameters Unit Specifications

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Maximum reflectance

dB

27

27

27

27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LRF and the LRFS.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

LRF LRFS

25.0 W 33.0 W

27.5 W 36.3 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the LRF or the LRFS.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 1.3 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6-12

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

6.3 LBE/LBES
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LBE board and the LBES board. The LBE and the LBES are the same in function and principle, but are different in encoding mode.

6.3.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LBE and the LBES.
Functionality Description LBE LBES

Basic function

Accesses one 10GE-LAN optical signal at the client side. Converts signal into DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.

Encoding mode

Supports NRZ encoding.

Supports CRZ encoding. The use of CRZ encoding will increase system tolerance to OSNR and extend the transmission distance.

Tunable wavelength function

Supports tunable wavelength optical module. The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and 196.05 THz, totally 80 wavelengths at an interval of 50 GHz.

FEC function Overhead processing ESC function Alarms and performance events monitoring

Adopts Huaweis own AFEC encoding established on ITU-T G.975. Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709. Multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channel for transmission. Provides scrambling, CRC, defect indication and 10 GE service performance monitoring functions. Monitors SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes ,Pause frame. Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on: Laser bias current Laser cooling current Laser working temperature Optical power

ALS function Protection schemes

Provides ALS function. Supports 1:N optical channel protection, inter board 1+1 optical channel protection.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-13

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6.3.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-5 shows the principle block diagram of the LBE and the LBES.
Client side WDM side

10GE-LAN

Optical transponder module

G.694.1

Performance and alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-5 Principle block diagram of the LBE and the LBES

The LBE and the LBES are the same in working principle. Below describes the working principle of the LBE as an example. At the client side: The optical transponder module of the LBE receives one 10GE-LAN signal. The module processes and encodes the signal. The optical transmitter of the module outputs DWDM signal compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. At the DWDM side: The LBE receives optical signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical transponder module processes the signals. The module outputs the original 10GE-LAN signal. The LBE monitors corresponding performance indexes and alarm signals such as LOS and CRC error. The LBE also provides scrambling, CRC and defect indication. Moreover, the LBE monitors SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes and Pause frame.

6-14

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

6.3.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-6 shows the front panel of the LBE and the LBES.

LBE

LBES

RUN ALM

RUN ALM

TX OUT

TX OUT

RX IN

RX IN

Figure 6-6 Front panel of the LBE and the LBES

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LBE or the LBES.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LBE or the LBES.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-15

6 Optical Transponder Unit Interface Connector type Description

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

IN OUT Tx Rx

LC LC LC LC

Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the OADM board to receive DWDM signals. Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM board to transmit DWDM signals. Transmits service signals to the client side. Receives service signals from the client side.

6.3.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LBE and the LBES.
Table 6-6 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the LBE/LBES
Parameters Unit Specifications

Optical Interface type Optical interface bit rate Line code format Optical source type Target distance km Gbit/s

10G Base -LR 10.3125 NRZ SLM 10

10G Base -ER 10.3125 NRZ SLM 40

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio nm dBm dBm dB 12901330 1 6 +6 15301565 +2 4.7 +8.2

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance Jitter characteristics dBm dBm dB PIN 11 1 27 PIN 14 1 27

Compliant with G.783

6-16

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 6-7 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LBE/LBES
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing Line code format

GHz

50 NRZ CRZ

100 NRZ CRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn Maximum mean launched power dBm Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Nominal Central frequency dBm dB THz 0 5 +10 192.10196. 05, 186.95190. 90 Central frequency deviation Maximum 20dB spectral width Minimum SMSR Maximum dispersion Eye pattern mask GHz nm dB ps/nm 5 0.3 35 800 Compliant with G.691 5 0.56 30 300 to +500 NA 0 5 +13 192.10196. 05 0 5 +10 192.10196. 00, 186.95190. 90 10 0.3 35 800 Compliant with G.691 10 0.64 30 300 to +500 NA 0 5 +13 192.10196. 00

Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 12001650 14 1 27 PIN 12001650 16 0 27 PIN 12001650 14 0 27 PIN 12001650 16 0 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LBE and the LBES.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

LBE LBES

31.6 W 44.3 W

34.8 W 48.7 W

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-17

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the LBE or the LBES.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 1.7 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6.4 TMX/TMXS
This section describes the functions and specifications of the TMX board and the TMXS board. The TMX and the TMXS are the same in function and principle, but are different in encoding mode.

6.4.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the TMX and the TMXS.
Functionality Description TMX TMXS

Basic function

Multiplexes four STM-16/OC-48 signals into an OTU2 signal. Converts the signals into DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.

Encoding mode

Supports NRZ encoding.

Supports CRZ encoding. The use of CRZ encoding will increase system tolerance to OSNR and extend the transmission distance.

FEC function Tunable wavelength function

Adopts the AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1 Supports tunable wavelength optical module. The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and 196.05THz, totally 80 wavelengths.

Adopts the AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1

Overhead processing

Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709.

6-18

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Functionality Description TMX TMXS

6 Optical Transponder Unit

ESC function Alarms and performance events monitoring

Multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channel for transmission. Monitors B1, B2, SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults. Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on: Laser bias current Laser cooling current Laser working temperature Optical power

ALS function Protection schemes

Provides the ALS function. Supports client side 1+1 protection, inter board 1+1 optical channel protection.

6.4.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-7 shows the principle block diagram of the TMX and the TMXS.
Client side STM-16/OC-48 STM-16/OC-48 STM-16/OC-48 STM-16/OC-48 Performance and alarm monitoring Optical transponder module G.694.1 WDM side

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-7 Principle block diagram of the TMX and the TMXS

The TMX and the TMXS are the same in working principle. Below describes the working principle of the TMX as an example. At the client side: The TMX accesses four channels of STM-16/OC-48 signals. After mapping, asynchronous multiplexing, and FEC encoding, the signals are converted by the optical transponder module into OTU2 signals compliant with G.709. The module

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-19

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

outputs a channel of optical signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 at the DWDM side. At the DWDM side: The TMX accesses a channel of OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical transponder module demultiplexes, processes and converts the accessed signals. The module outputs four channels of STM-16/OC-48 signals at the client side. The board takes measures for jitter suppression. Also, the board monitors the related performance indexes and alarm signals.

6.4.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-8 shows the front panel of the TMX and the TMXS.

TMX

TMXS

RUN ALM
IN OUT RX1 TX1 RX2 TX2

RUN ALM
IN OUT RX1 TX1 RX2 TX2

RX3 TX3 RX4 TX4

RX3 TX3 RX4 TX4

Figure 6-8 Front panel of the TMX and the TMXS

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the TMX or the TMXS.

6-20

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Indicator Colour Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are ten optical interfaces on the front panel of the TMX or the TMXS.
Interface Connector type Description

IN OUT Tx1Tx4 Rx1Rx4

LC LC LC LC

Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the OADM board to receive DWDM signal. Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM board to transmit DWDM signal. Transmits service signals to the client side. Receives service signals from the client side.

6.4.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the TMX and the TMXS.
Table 6-8 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the TMX
Parameters Unit Specifications

Optical Interface type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km

I-16 NRZ MLM 2

S-16.1 NRZ SLM 15

L-16.1 NRZ SLM 40

L-16.2 NRZ SLM 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power nm dBm dBm 12601360 3 10 12601360 0 5 12601360 +3 2 15001580 +3 2

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-21

6 Optical Transponder Unit Parameters Unit Specifications

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Minimum extinction ratio Maximum 20 dB spectrum width Minimum SMSR Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask

dB nm dB ps/nm

+8.2 1 NA NA

+8.2 1 30 NA

+8.2 1 30 NA

+8.2 1 30 1600

Compliant with G.957

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance Jitter characteristics nm dBm dBm dB PIN 12001650 18 3 27 PIN 12001650 18 0 27 APD 12001650 27 9 27 APD 12001650 28 9 27

Compliant with G.783

Table 6-9 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the TMX/TMXS
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing Line code format

GHz

50 NRZ CRZ

100 NRZ CRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn Maximum mean launched power dBm Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Nominal Central frequency dBm dB THz 0 5 +10 192.10196. 05, 186.95190. 90 Central frequency deviation Maximum 20dB spectral width Minimum SMSR Maximum dispersion GHz nm dB ps/nm 5 0.3 35 800 5 0.56 30 300 to +500 0 5 +13 192.10196. 05 0 5 +10 192.10196. 00, 186.95190. 90 10 0.3 35 800 10 0.64 30 300 to +500 0 5 +13 192.10196. 00

6-22

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Parameters Unit Specifications

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Eye pattern mask

Compliant with G.691

NA

Compliant with G.691

NA

Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 12001650 14 1 27 PIN 12001650 16 0 27 PIN 12001650 14 0 27 PIN 12001650 16 0 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the TMX and the TMXS.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

TMX TMXS

42.0 W 46.4 W

46.2 W 51.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the TMX or the TMXS.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W) 1.8 kg 2 IU1IU5, IU8IU12

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-23

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6.5 TMR/TMRS
This section describes the functions and specifications of the TMR board and the TMRS board.

6.5.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the TMR and the TMRS.
Functionality Description TMR TMRS

Basic function

Used in an REG station to regenerate corresponding optical signals. The TMR and the TMRS can regenerate unidirectional optical signals.

Regenerating rate Relative OTU Encoding mode

10.71Gbit/s LBE, TMX, LOG, E3LWF Supports NRZ encoding. LBES, TMXS, LOGS, E3LWFS Supports CRZ encoding. The use of CRZ encoding will increase system tolerance to OSNR and extend the transmission distance.

FEC function Tunable wavelength function

Adopts the AFEC encoding specified in Adopts the AFEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975.1. ITU-T G.975.1. Supports tunable wavelength optical module. The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and 196.05 THz, totally 80 wavelengths at 50 GHz interval.

Overhead processing Alarms and performance events monitoring

Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709. Monitors SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults. Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on: Laser bias current Laser cooling current Laser working temperature Optical power

ALS function

Provides the ALS function.

6-24

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

6.5.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-9 shows the principle block diagram of the TMR and the TMRS.
WDM side WDM side

G.694.1

Regenerating module

G.694.1

Performance and alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-9 Principle block diagram of the TMR and the TMRS

The TMR and the TMRS are the same in working principle. Below describes the working principle of the TMR as an example. The TMR accesses only one channel of optical signals. The regenerating module reshapes, regenerates and retimes the accessed signals. The module outputs the processed optical signals.

6.5.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-10 shows the front panel of the TMR and the TMRS.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-25

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

TMR

TMRS

RUN ALM

RUN ALM

IN OUT

IN OUT

Figure 6-10 Front panel of the TMR and the TMRS

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the TMR or the TMRS.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

6-26

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TMR or the TMRS.
Interface Connector type Description

IN OUT

LC LC

Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the OADM board to receive DWDM signal. Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM board to transmit DWDM signal.

6.5.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the TMR and the TMRS.
Table 6-10 Optical interface parameter specifications of the TMR/TMRS
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing Line code format

GHz

50 NRZ CRZ

100 NRZ CRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn Maximum mean launched power dBm Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Nominal Central frequency dBm dB THz 0 5 +10 192.10196. 05, 186.95190. 90 Central frequency deviation Maximum 20dB spectral width Minimum SMSR Maximum dispersion Eye pattern mask GHz nm dB ps/nm 5 0.3 35 800 Compliant with G.691 5 0.56 30 300 to +500 NA 0 5 +13 192.10196. 05 0 5 +10 192.10196. 00, 186.95190. 90 10 0.3 35 800 Compliant with G.691 10 0.64 30 300 to +500 NA 0 5 +13 192.10196. 00

Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn Receiver type PIN PIN PIN PIN

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-27

6 Optical Transponder Unit Parameters Unit Specifications

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance

nm dBm dBm dB

12001650 14 1 27

12001650 16 0 27

12001650 14 0 27

12001650 16 0 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the TMR and the TMRS.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

TMR TMRS

22.3 W 35.0 W

24.5 W 38.5 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the TMR or the TMRS.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 1.3 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6-28

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

6.6 LWC1
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LWC1 board.

6.6.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LWC1.
Functionality Description

Basic function

Accesses STM-16/OC-48 optical signal compliant with ITU-T G.957 at the client side. Converts the signal into OTU1 optical signal and outputs DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.

Encoding mode Tunable wavelength function

Supports NRZ encoding. Supports tunable wavelength optical module. The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and 196.0 THz, totally 40 wavelengths at a 100-GHz interval. Adopts the FEC encoding specified in ITU-T G.975 to enhance the equivalent sensitivity of SDH transmission system and prolong the span distance effectively. Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709. Multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channel for transmission. Monitors B1, B2, SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults. Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on: Laser bias current Laser cooling current Laser working temperature Optical power

FEC function Overhead processing ESC function Alarms and performance events monitoring

ALS function Protection schemes

Provides ALS function. Supports 1:N optical channel protection, inter board 1+1 optical channel protection.

6.6.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-11 shows the principle block diagram of the LWC1.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-29

6 Optical Transponder Unit


Client side WDM side

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

STM-16/OC-48

Optical transponder module

G.694.1

Performance and alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-11 Principle block diagram of the LWC1

Below describes the working principle. At the client side: The LWC1 receives, processes and encodes the STM-16/OC-48 signal. The transmitting optical module inside the LWC1 outputs OTU1 optical signal with the wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. At the DWDM side: The LWC1 receives and processes the optical signal with the wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The LWC1 decodes the signal to restore the original STM-16/OC-48 signal. The LWC1 sends out the STM-16/OC-48 signal to the equipment at the client side. The corresponding performance indexes, such as B1 bit error, can be monitored during the process.

6.6.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-12 shows the front panel of the LWC1.

6-30

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

LWC1

RUN ALM
TX OUT

RX IN

Figure 6-12 Front panel of the LWC1

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LWC1.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWC1.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-31

6 Optical Transponder Unit Interface Connector type Description

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

IN OUT Tx Rx

LC LC LC LC

Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the OADM board to receive WDM signals. Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM board to transmit WDM signals. Transmits service signals to the client side. Receives service signals from the client side.

6.6.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LWC1.
Table 6-11 Optical interface parameter specifications at client side of the LWC1
Parameters Unit Specifications

Optical Interface type Line code format Optical source type Target distance km

I-16 NRZ MLM 2

S-16.1 NRZ SLM 15

L-16.1 NRZ SLM 40

L-16.2 NRZ SLM 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum 20 dB spectrum width Minimum SMSR Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range nm PIN 12001650 PIN 12001650 APD 12001650 APD 12001650 nm dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 12601360 3 10 +8.2 1 NA NA 12601360 0 5 +8.2 1 30 NA 12601360 +3 2 +8.2 1 30 NA 15001580 +3 2 +8.2 1 30 1600

Compliant with G.957

6-32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Parameters Unit Specifications

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance Jitter characteristics

dBm dBm dB

18 3 27

18 0 27

27 9 27

28 9 27

Compliant with G.783

Table 6-12 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LWC1
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing Line code format

GHz

100 NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum 20dB spectral width Minimum SMSR Maximum dispersion Eye pattern mask Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 12001650 25 9 27 PIN 12001650 18 0 27 dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 0 10 +10 192.10196.00 10 0.2 35 12800 Compliant with G.957

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LWC1.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-33

6 Optical Transponder Unit Board Maximum power consumption at 250C

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Maximum power consumption at 550C

LWC1

21.5 W

23.6 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the LWC1.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 1.1 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6-34

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

6.7 TRC1
This section describes the functions and specifications of the TRC1 board.

6.7.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the TRC1.
Functionality Description

Basic function Regenerating rate Relative OTU Encoding mode Tunable wavelength function

Used in an REG station to regenerate corresponding optical signals. The TRC1 can regenerate unidirectional optical signals. 2.66Gbit/s LWC1, FDG Supports NRZ encoding. Supports tunable wavelength optical module. The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and 196.0 THz, totally 40 wavelengths at a 100-GHz interval. Adopts FEC function to enhance the equivalent sensitivity of SDH transmission system and prolong the span distance effectively. Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709. Monitors B1, B2, SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults. Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on: Laser bias current Laser cooling current Laser working temperature Optical power

FEC function Overhead processing Alarms and performance events monitoring

ALS function

Provides ALS function.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-35

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6.7.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-13 shows the principle block diagram of the TRC1.
WDM side WDM side

G.694.1

Regenerating module

G.694.1

Performance and alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-13 Principle block diagram of the TRC1

The working principle of the TRC1 is described as follows. The TRC1 accesses only one channel of optical signals. The regenerating module reshapes, regenerates and retimes the accessed signals. The module outputs the processed optical signals.

6.7.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-14 shows the front panel of the TRC1.

6-36

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

TRC1

RUN ALM

IN OUT

Figure 6-14 Front panel of the TRC1

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the TRC1.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TRC1.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-37

6 Optical Transponder Unit Interface Connector type Description

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

IN OUT

LC LC

Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the OADM board to receive WDM signals. Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM board to transmit WDM signals.

6.7.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the TRC1.
Table 6-13 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the TRC1
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing Line code format

GHz

100 NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum 20dB spectral width Minimum SMSR Maximum dispersion Eye pattern mask Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 12001650 25 9 27 PIN 12001650 18 0 27 dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 0 10 +10 192.10196.00 10 0.2 35 12800 Compliant with G.957

6-38

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the TRC1.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

TRC1

21.5 W

23.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the TRC1.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 1.0 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6.8 LWM
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LWM board.

6.8.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LWM.
Function Description

Basic function

Accesses the optical signal at three rates: STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12 or STM-16/OC-48. Converts the signal to DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.

Encoding mode Tunable wavelength function

Supports NRZ encoding. Supports tunable wavelength optical module. The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and 196.0 THz, support 40 wavelengths at a 100-GHz interval. Monitors B1 byte to help locate faults. Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on:

Alarms and performance events monitoring

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-39

6 Optical Transponder Unit Function Description

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Laser bias current Laser cooling current Laser working temperature Optical power ALS function Protection schemes Provides ALS function. Supports inter board 1+1 optical channel protection.

6.8.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-15 shows the principle block diagram of the LWM.
Client side STM-1/OC-3 STM-4/OC-12 STM-16/OC-48 WDM side

Optical transponder module

G.694.1

Performance and alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-15 Principle block diagram of the LWM

The working principle of the LWM is described as follows. At the client side: The LWM accesses optical signals at a rate of STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12 or STM-16/OC-48. The optical transponder module processes and converts these signals. The module outputs optical signals with the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard wavelengths to the DWDM side. At the DWDM side: The LWM accesses optical signals with the standard wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical transponder module processes and converts these signals. The module outputs optical signals at the rate of STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12 or STM-16/OC-48.

6-40

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

The optical transponder module also monitors the B1 bytes. Jitter suppression measures are taken during signal process.

6.8.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-16 shows the front panel of the LWM.

LWM

RUN ALM

RX TX

IN OUT

Figure 6-16 Front panel of the LWM

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LWM.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-41

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWM with a pair of input and output optical interfaces.
Interface Connector type Description

IN OUT Tx Rx

LC LC LC LC

Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the OADM board to receive WDM signals. Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM board to transmit WDM signals. Transmits service signals to the client side. Receives service signals from the client side.

6.8.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LWM.
Table 6-14 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the LWM
Parameters Unit Specifications

Optical interface rate Line code format Optical source type Target distance km

STM-1/4/16, OC-3/12/48 NRZ MLM 2

STM-1/4/16, OC-3/12/48 NRZ SLM 15

STM-1/4/16, OC-3/12/48 NRZ SLM 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Maximum 20 dB spectrum width Minimum side-mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance nm dBm dBm dB nm dB ps/nm 12601360 3 10 +8.2 1 NA NA 12601360 0 5 +8.2 1 30 NA 15001580 +3 2 +8.2 1 30 1600

6-42

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Parameters Unit Specifications

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Eye pattern mask Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance Jitter characteristics nm dBm dBm dB

Compliant with G.957

Compliant with G.957

Compliant with G.957

PIN 12001650 18 3 27

PIN 12001650 18 0 27

APD 12001650 28 9 27

Compliant with G.783

Table 6-15 Optical interface parameter specifications at DWDM side of the LWM
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing Line code format

GHz

100 NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum 20dB spectral width Minimum SMSR Maximum dispersion Eye pattern mask Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 12001650 25 9 27 PIN 12001650 18 0 27 dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 0 10 +10 192.10196.00 10 0.2 35 12800 Compliant with G.957

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-43

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LWM.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

LWM

27.0 W

29.7 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LWM.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 1.1 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6.9 LWMR
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LWMR board.

6.9.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LWMR.
Functionality Description

Basic function

Used in an REG station to regenerate corresponding optical signals. The LWMR can regenerate bi-directional optical signals.

Regenerating rate Relative OTU Encoding mode Tunable wavelength function

STM-16, STM-4, STM-1 LWM Supports NRZ encoding. Supports tunable wavelength optical module. The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and 196.0 THz, totally 40 wavelengths at a 100-GHz interval.

6-44

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Functionality Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Alarms and performance events monitoring

Monitors B1 byte to help locate faults. Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on: Laser bias current Laser cooling current Laser working temperature Optical power

ALS function

Provides ALS function.

6.9.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-17 shows the principle block diagram of the LWMR.
WDM side WDM side

G.694.1

Regenerating module

G.694.1

Performance and alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-17 Principle block diagram of the LWMR

The LWMR accesses a channel of optical signals at each transmission direction. The regenerating module reshapes, regenerates and retimes the accessed signals. It outputs the processed signals. The reverse process is similar.

6.9.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-18 shows the front panel of the LWMR.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-45

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

LWMR

RUN ALM

OUT1OUT2

IN1 IN2

Figure 6-18 Front panel of the LWMR

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LWMR.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

6-46

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWMR.
Interface Connector type Description

IN1/IN2 OUT1/OUT2

LC LC

Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the OADM board to receive WDM signals. Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM board to transmit WDM signals.

6.9.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LWMR.
Table 6-16 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module at DWDM side of the LWMR
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing Line code format

GHz

100 NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum 20 dB spectral width Minimum SMSR Maximum dispersion Eye pattern mask dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 0 10 +10 191.30196.00 10 0.2 35 12800 Compliant with G.957

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload nm dBm dBm APD 12001650 25 9 PIN 12001650 18 0

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-47

6 Optical Transponder Unit Parameters Unit Specifications

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Maximum reflectance

dB

27

27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LWMR.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

LWMR

25.0 W

27.5 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LWMR.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 1.0 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6.10 LWX
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LWX board.

6.10.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LWX.
Functionality Description

Basic function

Accesses the arbitrary rate optical signal (34 Mbit/s2.7 Gbit/s) at 770 nm1565 nm Converts the signal to DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. Accesses non-common services, such as PDH (34 Mbit/s, 45 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s optical interface), enterprise system connection (ESCON) (200 Mbit/s), fibre channel (FC) (1.06 Gbit/s, 2.12 Gbit/s).

6-48

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Functionality Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Encoding mode Tunable wavelength function

Supports NRZ encoding. Supports tunable wavelength optical module. The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and 196.0 THz, totally 40 wavelengths at a 100-GHz interval. Monitors B1 byte to help locate faults. Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on: Laser bias current Laser cooling current Laser working temperature Optical power

Alarms and performance events monitoring

ALS function Protection schemes

Provides ALS function. Supports inter board 1+1 optical channel protection.

6.10.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-19 shows the principle block diagram of the LWX.
Client side WDM side

34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s

Optical transponder module

G.694.1

Performance and alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-19 Principle block diagram of the LWX

The working principle of the LWX is described as follows. At the client side:

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-49

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

The LWX receives the optical signals at an arbitrary rate (34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s). The optical transponder module processes the signal. The module outputs optical signal compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 at the DWDM side. At the DWDM side: The LWX receives DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical transponder module processes the signals. The module outputs arbitrary rate optical signals (at 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s) at the client side. The optical transponder module of the LWX has jitter suppression function. This guarantees good jitter suppression performance.

6.10.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-20 shows the front panel of the LWX.

LWX

RUN ALM

RX TX

IN OUT

Figure 6-20 Front panel of the LWX

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LWX.

6-50

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Indicator Colour Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWX with a pair of input and output optical interfaces.
Interface Connector type Description

IN OUT Tx Rx

LC LC LC LC

Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the OADM board to receive WDM signals. Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM board to transmit WDM signals. Transmits service signals to the client side. Receives service signals from the client side.

6.10.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LWX.
Table 6-17 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the LWX
Parameters Unit Specifications

Optical interface rate Line code format Optical source type Target distance km

34M2.7G NRZ MLM 2

34M2.7G NRZ SLM 15

34M2.7G NRZ SLM 80

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Operating wavelength range Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power nm dBm dBm 12601360 3 10 12601360 0 5 15001580 +3 2

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-51

6 Optical Transponder Unit Parameters Unit Specifications

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Minimum extinction ratio Maximum 20 dB spectrum width Minimum side-mode suppression ratio Dispersion tolerance Eye pattern mask

dB nm dB ps/nm

+8.2 1 NA NA Compliant with G.957

+8.2 1 30 NA Compliant with G.957

+8.2 1 30 1600 Compliant with G.957

Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 12001650 18 3 27 PIN 12001650 18 0 27 APD 12001650 28 9 27

Table 6-18 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LWX
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing Line code format

GHz

100 NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum 20dB spectral width Minimum SMSR Maximum dispersion Eye pattern mask Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn Receiver type APD PIN dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 0 10 +10 192.10196.00 10 0.2 35 12800 Compliant with G.957

6-52

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Parameters Unit Specifications

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance

nm dBm dBm dB

12001650 25 9 27

12001650 18 0 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LWX.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

LWX

27.0 W

29.7 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the LWX.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 1.0 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-53

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6.11 LWXR
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LWXR board.

6.11.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LWXR.
Function Description

Basic function

Used in an REG station to regenerate corresponding optical signals. The LWMR can regenerate bi-directional optical signals.

Regenerating rate Relative OTU Encoding mode Tunable wavelength function

34 Mbit/s2.7 Gbit/s LWX Supports NRZ encoding. Supports tunable wavelength optical module. The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and 196.0 THz, totally 40 wavelengths at a 100-GHz interval. Monitors B1 byte to help locate faults. Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on: Laser bias current Laser cooling current Laser working temperature Optical power

Alarms and performance events monitoring

ALS function

Provides ALS function.

6.11.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-21 shows the principle block diagram of the LWXR.

6-54

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description


WDM side WDM side

6 Optical Transponder Unit

G.694.1

Regenerating module

G.694.1

Performance and alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-21 Principle block diagram of the LWXR

The working principle of the LWXR is described as follows. The LWXR accesses one channel of optical signals in each transmission direction. The regenerating module reshapes, regenerates and retimes the accessed signals. It outputs the processed signals. The reverse process is similar.

6.11.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-22 shows the front panel of the LWXR.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-55

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

LWXR

RUN ALM

OUT1 OUT2

IN1 IN2

Figure 6-22 Front panel of the LWXR

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LWXR.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

6-56

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWXR.
Interface Connector type Description

IN1/IN2 OUT1/OUT2

LC LC

Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the OADM board to receive WDM signals. Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM board to transmit WDM signals.

6.11.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LWXR.
Table 6-19 Specifications of fixed wavelength optical module at DWDM side of the LWXR
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing Line code format

GHz

100 NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum 20dB spectral width Minimum SMSR Maximum dispersion Eye pattern mask Receiver parameter specifications at point R Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload nm dBm dBm APD 12001650 25 9 PIN 12001650 18 0 dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 0 10 +10 192.10196.00 10 0.2 35 12800 Compliant with G.957

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-57

6 Optical Transponder Unit Parameters Unit Specifications

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Maximum reflectance

dB

27

27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LWXR.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

LWXR

25.0 W

27.5 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the LWXR.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 1.0 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6-58

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

6.12 LDG/FDG
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LDG board and the FDG board.

6.12.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LDG. and FDG
Functionality Description

Basic function

The LDG board multiplexes two GE service signals into an STM-16 signal. The FDG board multiplexes two GE service signals into an OTU1 signal. Converts the signals into DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. In addition, the FDG board supports FEC correction.

Encoding mode Tunable wavelength function

Supports NRZ encoding. Supports tunable wavelength optical module. The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and 196.0 THz, totally 40 wavelengths at a 100-GHz interval. Multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channel for transmission. Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709. Provides GE service performance monitoring functions. Monitors B1, B2 bytes at WDM side to help locating faults. Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on: Laser bias current Laser cooling current Laser working temperature Optical power

ESC function Overhead processing Alarms and performance events monitoring

ALS function Protection schemes

Provides ALS function. The LDG and the FDG offer inter-board 1+1 protection, client-side protection.

6.12.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-23 shows the principle block diagram of the LDG.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-59

6 Optical Transponder Unit


Client side GE Optical transponder module GE G.694.1 WDM side

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Performance and alarm monitoring

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 6-23 Principle block diagram of the LDG

Below describes the working principle. At the client side: The LDG or FDG receives two GE signals compliant with IEEE 802.3z. These signals are multiplexed into one standard STM-16/OC-48 signal with frame structure. (For the FDG board, the frame structure is FEC encoded OTU1.) During this process, B1 and B2 bytes are monitored. The LDG or FDG converts STM-16/OC-48 signals into standard wavelength signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The LDG or FDG outputs the signals to the WDM side for transmission. At the DWDM side: The LDG or FDG receives signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The LDG extracts frames from the STM-16/OC-48 signal, and the FDG extracts frames from the received OTU1 frame. Meanwhile, the LDG or FDG monitors performance at the WDM side. The optical transponder module recovers the GE signals from the STM-16/OTU1 frames. After jitter suppression, the module outputs two IEEE 802.3z GE channels to GE router or other GE devices.

6.12.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-24 shows the front panel of the LDG and the FDG.

6-60

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

LDG

FDG

RUN ALM
RX1 TX1 RX2 TX2 IN OUT

RUN ALM
RX1 TX1 RX2 TX2 IN OUT

Figure 6-24 Front panel of the LDG and the FDG

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LDG. and the FDG
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDG with a pair of input and output optical interfaces.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-61

6 Optical Transponder Unit Interface Connector type Description

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

IN OUT Tx1/Tx2 Rx1/Rx2

LC LC LC LC

Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the OADM board to receive WDM signals. Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM board to transmit WDM signals. Connected with GE client-side equipment to transmit IEEE 802.3z standard signals. Connected with GE client-side equipment to receive IEEE 802.3z standard signals.

6.12.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following tables give the details about the optical specifications of the LDG. and the FDG.
Table 6-20 Optical interface parameter specifications at the client side of the LDG/FDG
Parameters Unit Specifications

Optical Interface type Transmitter parameter specifications at point S Laser operating wavelength Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Receiver parameter specifications at point R operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB nm dBm dBm dB

1000BASE-LX

1000BASE-SX

12701355 3.0 11.5 +9

770860 0 9.5 +9

12701355 19 3 12

770860 17 0 12

6-62

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Table 6-21 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LDG/FDG
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing Line code format

GHz

100 NRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Central frequency Central frequency deviation Maximum 20dB spectral width Minimum SMSR Maximum dispersion Eye pattern mask Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB APD 12001650 25 9 27 PIN 12001650 18 0 27 dBm dBm dB THz GHz nm dB ps/nm 0 10 +10 192.10196.00 10 0.2 35 12800 Compliant with G.957

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LDG and the FDG.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

LDG FDG

29.5 W 34.5 W

33.0 W 38.0 W

Note: The environment temperature range for the tunable wavelength FDG and LDG is -5 to +45

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the LDG.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-63

6 Optical Transponder Unit Item Specification

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 1.0 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

6.13 LOG/LOGS
This section describes the functions and specifications of the LOG board and the LOGS board. The LOG and the LOGS are the same in function and principle, but are different in encoding mode.

6.13.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the LOG and the LOGS.
Functionality Description LOG LOGS

Basic function

Multiplexes up to eight GE/FC100 service signals or four FC200 service signals into an OTU2 signal. Converts the signals into DWDM standard wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. The LOG board supports the internal cross-connection of eight client-side services. The services can be configured to different channels and optical interfaces so as to enable the flexible cross-connection and grooming of services.

Encoding mode FEC function Tunable wavelength function

Supports NRZ encoding.

Supports CRZ encoding.

Adopts AFEC encoding, increasing system tolerance to abominable environment. Supports tunable wavelength optical module. The output DWDM wavelength of the module is tunable between 192.1 THz and 196.05 THz, totally 80 wavelengths.

ESC function

Multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channel for transmission.

6-64

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Functionality Description LOG LOGS

6 Optical Transponder Unit

Overhead processing Alarms and performance events monitoring

Supports overhead processing compliant with ITU-T G.709. Provides GE or FC100 or FC200 service performance monitoring functions. Monitors SM_BIP8 byte at WDM side to help locating faults. Monitors performance indexes and alarm signals, including the monitoring on: Laser bias current Laser cooling current Laser working temperature Optical power

ALS function Protection schemes

Provides ALS function. Supports 1+1 OTU inter-board optical channel protection, client-side protection.

6.13.2 Working Principle


Figure 6-25 shows the principle block diagram of the LOG and the LOGS.
Client side GE or FC100/FC200 GE or FC100/FC200 GE or FC100 Performance and alarm monitoring Optical transponder module G.694.1 WDM side

CPU

Communication module

SCC board

Figure 6-25 Principle block diagram of the LOG and the LOGS

The LOG and the LOGS are the same in working principle. Below describes the working principle of the LOG as an example. At the client side: The LOG accesses eight channels of GE/FC100 signals or four channels of FC200 signals. The LOG can access the services at three different rates at the same time.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-65

6 Optical Transponder Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

The optical transponder module multiplexes, processes and converts the accessed signals. The module outputs a channel of OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 at the DWDM side. At the DWDM side: The LOG accesses a channel of OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The optical transponder module demultiplexes, processes and converts the accessed signals. The module outputs several channels of low-rate data signals at the client side.

6.13.3 Front Panel


Figure 6-26 shows the front panel of the LOG and the LOGS.

LOG
RUN ALM
RX1 TX1 RX2 TX2 RX3 TX3 RX4 TX4 RX5 TX5 RX6 TX6 RX7 TX7 RX8 TX8 IN OUT RX1 TX1 RX2 TX2 RX3 TX3 RX4 TX4 RX5 TX5 RX6 TX6 RX7 TX7 RX8 TX8

LOGS
RUN ALM

IN OUT

Figure 6-26 Front panel of the LOG and the LOGS

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the LOG or the LOGS.

6-66

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Indicator Colour Description

6 Optical Transponder Unit

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LOG or the LOGS.
Interface Connector type Description

IN OUT Tx1Tx8 Rx1Rx8

LC LC LC LC

Connected with the optical demultiplexer unit or the OADM board to receive DWDM signals. Connected with the optical multiplexer unit or the OADM board to transmit DWDM signals. Transmits service signals to the client side. Receives service signals from the client side.

6.13.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the LOG and LOGS.
Table 6-22 Optical interface parameter at the client side of the LOG and LOGS
Item Unit Parameter

Optical interface rate Transmitter parameters at point S Laser operating wavelength Maximum mean launched power Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Receiver parameters at point R Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity

Gbit/s

GE(1.25 Gbit/s) /FC100 (1.062 Gbit/s)

FC200 (2.125 Gbit/s)

nm dBm dBm dB

12701355 3.0 11.5 +9

770860 0 9.5 +9

770860 2.5 9.5 +9

nm dBm

12701650 19

770860 17

770860 17

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-67

6 Optical Transponder Unit Item Unit Parameter

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Receiver overload Maximum reflectance

dBm dB

3 12

0 12

0 12

Table 6-23 Optical interface parameter specifications at the DWDM side of the LOG/LOGS
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing Line code format

GHz

50 NRZ CRZ

100 NRZ CRZ

Transmitter parameter specifications at point Sn Maximum mean launched power dBm Minimum mean launched power Minimum extinction ratio Nominal Central frequency dBm dB THz 0 5 +10 192.10196. 05, 186.95190. 90 Central frequency deviation Maximum 20dB spectral width Minimum SMSR Maximum dispersion Eye pattern mask GHz nm dB ps/nm 5 0.3 35 800 Compliant with G.691 5 0.56 30 300 to +500 NA 0 5 +13 192.10196. 05 0 5 +10 192.10196. 00, 186.95190. 90 10 0.3 35 800 Compliant with G.691 10 0.64 30 300 to +500 NA 0 5 +13 192.10196. 00

Receiver parameter specifications at point Rn Receiver type Operating wavelength range Receiver sensitivity Receiver overload Maximum reflectance nm dBm dBm dB PIN 12001650 14 1 27 PIN 12001650 16 0 27 PIN 12001650 14 0 27 PIN 12001650 16 0 27

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the LOG and LOGS.

6-68

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Board Maximum power consumption at 250C

6 Optical Transponder Unit Maximum power consumption at 550C

LOG LOGS

43.2 W 51.8 W

47.5 W 57.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the LOG and LOGS.
Item Specification LOG LOGS

Weight Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

1.5 kg

1.8 kg

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W) 2 IU1IU5, IU9IU12

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6-69

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

This chapter describes the optical multiplexer, demultiplexer and add/drop units of the OptiX BWS 1600G in terms of: Functionality Working principle Front panel Technical specifications

Note The front panels shown in the schematic diagrams in this manual serve to identify the positions and silkscreens of the optical interfaces.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-1

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

7.1 M40 and V40


This section describes the functions and technical specifications of an M40 board and a V40 board. According to the working wavelength, the M40 is available in four types: C-ODD C-EVEN L-ODD L-EVEN The V40 is available in two types: C-ODD C-EVEN

7.1.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the M40 and the V40.
Functionality Description M40 V40 Multiplexes 40 channels with

Basic function

Multiplex 40 channels compliant with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1 with the channel spacing of 100 GHz into one main path.

the channel space of 100 GHz into the main path. Adjusts the output optical power of each wavelength signal.

Online optical performance monitoring Alarms and performance events monitoring

Provides an online monitoring port "MON". Hence, the optical performance of optical signals can be checked online through the MCA board or an optical spectrum analyser. Supports optical power detecting as well as alarm and performance event reporting.

7.1.2 Working Principle


Figure 7-1 shows the principle block diagram of the M40 and the V40.

7-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description


40 optical inputs

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

OUT MUX Splitter MON

SCC

Control and communication circuit

Figure 7-1 Principle block diagram of the M40 and the V40

At the transmit end of an open system: The M40 multiplexes the optical signals from 40 OTUs at the transmit end into one optical fibre for transmission. At the transmit end of an integrated system: The M40 directly multiplexes the line optical signals from 40 customer equipment into the main path. The M40 sends the signals to the ITL for C or L band odd/even multiplexing and outputs the signals to the optical amplifier. In terms of functional modules, the M40 comprises optical modules and electrical modules. The optical module consists of an optical multiplexer for multiplexing and an optical splitter for output of 40 wavelengths. The electrical module refers to a control and communication circuit. This circuit controls the temperature of the multiplexer, checks the total power of output signals and communicates with the SCC. The V40 works in a similar way as the M40. But the V40 is added with a 40-channel variable optical attenuator.

7.1.3 Front Panel


Figure 7-2 shows the front panel of the M40 and the V40.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-3

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

M40

V40

RUN

RUN

ALM 196.00 MONOUT M01M02 M03 M04 M05M06


196.00

ALM

MONOUT M01M02 M03 M04 M05M06

M07M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13M14 M15M16 M17M18 M19 M20 M21 M22

M07M08 M09 M10 M11 M12 M13M14 M15 M16 M17M18 M19 M20 M21 M22

M23 M24 M25M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33M34 M35 M36

M23 M24 M25M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33M34 M35 M36

M37 M38 M39 M40 192.10

M37 M38 M39 M40 192.10

Note: The values 196.00 and 192.10 indicate the frequencies of the first and the last wavelengths that can be multiplexed by this board.

Figure 7-2 Front panel of the M40 and the V40

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the M40 or the V40.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

7-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the front panel of the M40 or the V40.
Interface Connector type Description

M01M40 OUT MON

LC LC LC

Receives the signals to be multiplexed. Transmits multiplexed signals. Connect ITL for odd/even multiplexing; otherwise, connect OAU. Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.

7.1.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the M40 and the V40.
Parameters Unit Specifications (40-channel)

Channel spacing Insertion loss Reflectance Operating wavelength range Isolation (adjacent channels) Isolation (non-adjacent channels) Polarization dependent loss (PDL) Temperature characteristics Maximum channel insertion loss difference

GHz dB dB nm dB dB dB pm/C dB

100 <8 /10 (Note 1) <40 15291561/15701604 (Note 2) >22 >25 <0.5 <2 <3

Note1: 10 is for V40. Before delivery, the VOA value of each channel in V40 is set to 3dB. Thus, the value of insertion loss may be 13 dB in testing. The VOA value can be adjusted according to the actual requirement. Note2: The wavelength range of the C-band multiplexer is 1529 nm 1561 nm. The wavelength range of the L-band multiplexer is 1570 nm 1604 nm. The center wavelength is compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendation.

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the M40 and the V40.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-5

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit Board Maximum power consumption at 250C

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Maximum power consumption at 550C

M40 V40

20.0 W 46.0 W

22.0 W 50.6 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the M40 or the V40.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W) 2.2 kg 2 IU2IU6, IU9IU13

7.2 D40
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the D40 board. According to the working wavelengths, the D40 is available in four types: C-ODD C-EVEN L-ODD L-EVEN

7.2.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the D40.
Functionality Description

Basic function

Demultiplexes main path signal to 40 channels compliant with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1 of service with the channel space of 100 GHz. Provides an online monitoring port "MON" to monitor the optical spectrum of the main path online through the MCA board or an optical spectrum analyser. Supports optical power detecting as well as support alarm and performance event reporting.

Online optical performance monitoring Alarms and performance events monitoring

7-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

7.2.2 Working Principle


Figure 7-3 shows the principle block diagram of the D40.
MON

Splitter

Input

DMUX

SCC

Control and communication circuit

Figure 7-3 Principle block diagram of the D40

At the receive end of an open system: The D40 demultiplexes the optical signal from the main path into 40 optical signals of different wavelengths. The signal is transmitted on a single optical fibre.. At the receive end of an integrated system: The D40 directly receives the line optical signal from the main path. The D40 demultiplexes the signal to 40 client-side equipment. In terms of functional modules, the D40 comprises optical modules and electrical modules. The optical module consists of an optical demultiplexer and an optical splitter. The electrical module refers to a control and communication circuit. This circuit controls the temperature of the demultiplexer, checks the total power of input signal and communicates with the SCC.

7.2.3 Front Panel


Figure 7-4 shows the front panel of the D40.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

40 optical outputs

7-7

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

D40

RUN

ALM
196.00

MON IN D01D02 D03 D04 D05D06

D07 D08 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22

D23D24 D25D26 D27D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33D34 D35D36

D37D38 D39 D40


192.10

Note: The values 196.00 and 192.10 indicate the frequencies of the first and the last wavelengths that can be multiplexed by this board.

Figure 7-4 Front panel of the D40

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the D40.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

7-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the front panel of the D40.
Interface Connector type Description

D01D40 IN

LC LC

Transmits demultiplexed signals to OTUs. Receives the signals to be demultiplexed. Connects ITL for odd/even demultiplexing; otherwise, connects the OAU directly.

MON

LC

Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.

7.2.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the D40.
Parameters Unit Specifications (40-channel)

Channel spacing Insertion loss Reflectance Isolation (adjacent channels) Isolation (non-adjacent channels) Polarization dependent loss (PDL) Temperature characteristics Maximum channel insertion loss difference 1dB spectral width 20dB spectral width

GHz dB dB dB dB dB pm/C dB nm nm

100GHz <8 <40 >25 >25 <0.5 <2 <3 >0.2 <1.4

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the D40.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

D40

20.0 W

22.0 W

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-9

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the D40.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W) 1.6 kg 2 IU2IU6, IU9IU13

7.3 MR2
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the MR2 board.

7.3.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the MR2.
Functionality Description

Basic function

Adds/Drops and multiplex two channels of signals from the multiplexed signals. Can be used for C-band and L-band. Provides the optical interface to concatenate other MR2s.

Concatenate function

7.3.2 Working Principle


Figure 7-5 shows the principle block diagram of the MR2.

7-10

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

A01

A02

OUT IN OADM optical module

MI MO

Communication module

SCC

D01

D02

Figure 7-5 Principle block diagram of the MR2

The MR2 consists of optical modules and electrical modules. The optical module includes an add/drop optical module which adds or drops two channels of signals. The optical module fulfils the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelength channels. The module also provides intermediate interface for the interconnection with other OADM boards. Thus, the system can add or drop more services at the local station. The electrical module consists of a communication circuit. This circuit reports the parameter (such as the wavelength to be added or dropped) of the optical module to the SCC. The module communicates with the SCC, and reports the board configuration. "IN" receives multiplexed signals and drops the multiplexed signals through the drop module. "OUT" transmits multiplexed signals and adds two client channels through the add module. "MI" and "MO" are two extended ports used for cascading other MR2.

7.3.3 Front Panel


Figure 7-6 shows the front panel of the MR2.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-11

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

MR2

RUN

ALM

A01

A02

D01

D02

OUT MO

IN

MI

Figure 7-6 Front panel of the MR2

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the MR2.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

7-12

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR2.
Interface Connector type Description

IN/OUT A01/A02

LC LC

Receives or transmits the multiplexed signals. Receives the optical signals from the OTU or integrated client-side equipment, and thus adding one channel into the multiplexed signal respectively. Transmits optical signals to the OTU or integrated client-side equipment, and thus dropping one channel from the multiplexed signal respectively. Cascades input or output interfaces; used to concatenate another MR2, adding or dropping others channel in the multiplexed signal.

D01/D02

LC

MI/MO

LC

7.3.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the MR2.
Parameters Unit Specifications

Channel spacing Operating wavelength range 1dB spectral width Insertion loss of Add/Drop wavelength channel Insertion loss of pass-through channel Isolation of adjacent channels Add/Drop channel flatness Return loss Polarization dependent loss (PDL) Polarization mode dispersion (PMD) Maximum input power Working temperature Temperature characteristics

GHz nm nm dB dB dB dB dB dB ps dBm C pm/C

100GHz C band: 15291570 >0.2 <2.5 <3.0 >25 <1 40 <0.2 0.15 24 5 to +55 <2

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-13

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit Parameters Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Specifications

Insertion variation with temperature

dB/C

<0.006

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the MR2.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

MR2

7.0 W

7.7 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the MR2.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 1.0 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

7.4 DWC
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the DWC board.

7.4.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the DWC.

7-14

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Functionality Description

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

Basic function

Used with the optical multiplexer, optical demultiplexer to realise the reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) function dynamically. The function is to adjust the wavelengths added to or dropped from each node, and to adjust the wavelengths resource allocation among nodes by adjusting the pass-through or congestion status of wavelengths. This operation does not affect the service transmission on the main optical channel.

Online optical performance monitoring

Provides in-service monitoring interfaces. The MCA board or the optical spectrum analyser can monitor the performance of the main optical channel. The monitoring does not affect the services. Adjusts the attenuation of any wavelength independently to control and equalise the power of each wavelength. Supports the T2000 software remote configuration to re-allocate fast wavelength.

Power equalization Network management function

7.4.2 Working Principle


Figure 7-7 shows the principle block diagram of the DWC.
DROP MON MO MI ADD

ROADM optical module IN OUT

CPU

Communication module

SCC board

Figure 7-7 Principle block diagram of the DWC

The multiplexed signal is accessed from the "IN" interface, split into the same two optical signals. One signal is sent to the WB optical module and the other is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit through the "DROP" optical interface. The WB optical module locates inside the ROADM optical module:

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-15

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Blocks or terminates the wavelengths received by the local node. Adjusts the power of other wavelengths in the signal. Outputs some optical signals to the "MON" interface. Sends other signals to the optical coupler. The signal to be transmitted from the local node is multiplexed, and is sent to the optical coupler through "ADD" interface. Then, the signal couples with the pass-through wavelength sent from WB. Finally, the signal is output from the "OUT" interface. "MI" and "MO" are interfaces used for cascading other DWC.

7.4.3 Front Panel


Figure 7-8 shows the front panel of the DWC.

DWC

RUN
OUT DROP

AL M

IN ADD MON

MI MO

Figure 7-8 Front panel of the DWC

7-16

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the DWC.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the DWC.
Interface Connector type Description

ADD DROP IN OUT MI/MO MON

LC LC LC LC LC LC

Connected with the OTU, receive signal added locally Connected with the OTU, drop service signal locally Receives multiplexed optical signals. Transmits multiplexed optical signals. Cascades input/output interface for another DWC. Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.

7.4.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the DWC.
Parameters Indices Unit

Channel spacing Working wavelength range Working wavelength number Channel attenuation range Insertion loss IN-DROP IN-MO(Note1) MI-OUT ADD-OUT

100 15291561 40 015 8.0 12.0 2.0 8.0

GHz nm

dB dB dB dB dB

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-17

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit Parameters Indices

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Unit

Insertion loss uniformity 0.5 dB bandwidth(Pass bandwidth) Block extinction ratio PMD PDL Return loss Maximum input optical power Module response time

1.0 > 50 > 35 < 0.5 < 0.7 > 40 25 < 50

dB GHz dB ps dB dB dBm ms

Note1: This is the insertion loss when the build-in VOA is set to 0.

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the DWC.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

DWC

16.0 W

17.6 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the DWC.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W) 0.9 kg 2 IU1IU5, IU8IU12

7-18

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

7.5 ITL
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the ITL board.

7.5.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the ITL.
Functionality Description

Basic function

Multiplexes or demultiplexes the odd channels and even channels. The ITL board comprises two interleavers for multiplexing and demultiplexing.

7.5.2 Working Principle


Figure 7-9 shows the principle block diagram of the ITL.

ODD 100 GHz EVEN

TO

50 GHz

Interleaver
IN TE

OAU

ODD 100 GHz EVEN

RO

50 GHz

Interleaver
OUT RE ITL

OAU

Figure 7-9 Principle block diagram of the ITL

Using interleaver technology, the ITL separates 80 channels with 50-GHz channel spacing in C-band or L-band into two streams of 40 channels with 100-GHz channel spacing at the receive end. The channels are uniformly spaced, and are separated into ODD and EVEN channels. The channels with 100-GHz channel spacing are sent to the matched boards for demultiplexing. At the transmit end, the whole process works reversely. The ITL consists of electrical module and optical module. The electrical module report whether the board is in position and the environment temperature..

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-19

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

The optical module consists of two interleavers. The interleaver separates the 50-GHz spaced optical signals input from OAU board into ODD and EVEN channels with 100-GHz channels spacing. In the reverse direction, the interleaver multiplexes the 100-GHz spaced ODD and EVEN channels from the M40 board into one stream with 50-GHz channel spacing.

7.5.3 Front Panel


Figure 7-10 shows the front panel of the ITL.

ITL

RUN ALM

TE RE

TO RO IN OUT

Figure 7-10 Front panel of the ITL

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the ITL.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

7-20

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the ITL.
Interface Connector type Description

TE TO RE RO IN OUT

LC LC LC LC LC LC

Transmits EVEN channels. Transmits ODD channels. Receives EVEN channels. Receives ODD channels. Receive interleavered signals. Transmit interleavered signals.

7.5.4 Parameter Description


The T2000 does not provide the parameters of a WDM interface on the ITL.

7.5.5 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the ITL.
Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range

nm

C-band: 15291561 L-band: 15701604

Input channel spacing Output channel spacing Insertion loss Maximum channel insertion loss difference Isolation Return loss Directivity Polarization mode dispersion (PMD) Polarization dependent loss (PDL) Input optical power range

GHz GHz dB dB dB dB dB ps dB dBm

100 50 <3 <1 >25 >40 >55 <0.5 <0.5 24

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-21

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the ITL.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

ITL

30.0 W

33.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the ITL.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 2.0 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

7.6 FIU
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the FIU board. The FIU board has two specifications: E1FIU and E2FIU. Besides the functions of the E1FIU, the E2FIU has the function to detect the input optical power and can perform the self-test of the internal voltage. The E1FIU and E2FIU have five types classified according to functions respectively. FIU- 01: Applicable only in the 1600G system without clock protection. FIU- 02: Applicable only in the system where clock protection is required (with 1625-nm protection wavelength). FIU-03: Supports only the multiplexing or demultiplexing of C-band and supervisory signals (1510 nm). The number of board components is decreased to save cost. FIU-03 is used in C-band 400G/100G system (type III and V systems) and C-band 800G system (type II). FIU-04: Supports only the multiplexing or demultiplexing of L-band and supervisory signals (1625 nm). The FIU-04 is applicable in the 400G (type-IV) system of L-band.

7-22

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

FIU-06: Supports only the multiplexing or demultiplexing of C-band and supervisory signals (1510 nm). The number of board components is decreased to save cost. The FIU06 is used on the occasion when the optical power is high. It can apply to the C-band 400G/100G system(type VI system).

7.6.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the FIU-01, FIU-02, FIU-03, FIU-04 and FIU-06.
Functionality FIU-01/02 Description FIU-03/06 FIU-04

Basic function

Multiplexes or demultiplexes the C-band channel, L-band channel and supervisory channel.

Multiplexes or demultiplexes the C-band channel and supervisory channel.

Multiplexes or demultiplexes the L-band channel and supervisory channel.

7.6.2 Working Principle


Figure 7-11 shows the principle block diagram of the FIU-01/FIU-02.
TMB TM

1625nm TC TL WDM

1510nm WDM C-band L-band C/L WDM IN

LINE RL RC WDM WDM 1625nm L-band C-band 1510nm C/L WDM Coupler OUT MON

RMB

RM

Figure 7-11 Principle block diagram of the FIU-01/FIU-02

In eastward transmission: 1. 2. The C/L WDM component divides the optical signal into C-band supervisory signal (1510 nm) and L-band supervisory signal (1625 nm). The C-band WDM extracts the optical supervisory channel (1510 nm) from the C-band signal and the L-band WDM extracts the optical supervisory channel (1625 nm).

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-23

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

3.

C-band and L-band signals are sent to the DWDM equipment through "TC" and "TL" respectively, and the supervisory channel is sent through "TM" and "TMB" for further processing.

In westward transmission: The C/L WDM component multiplexes the L-band+1625 multiplexed signal with C-band+1510 multiplexed signals and then outputs the signals. When the optical supervisory channel signal needs no protection, use the FIU-01. The FIU-01 does not provide the two WDM optical couplers. See the dotted lines in Figure 7-11. The FIU-03 is used in C-band system. This board includes two WDM components, multiplexing or demultiplexing the C-band signal and supervisory signal in the transmitting and receiving directions respectively. See Figure 7-12. The working principle of the FIU-06 is the same as that of the FIU-03. But the FIU-06 is used on the occasion when the optical power is high (Type VI system).
TM

1510 nm TC WDM C-band IN

LINE Coupler C-band RC WDM 1510 nm OUT MON

RM

Figure 7-12 Principle block diagram of the FIU-03/06

The FIU-04 is used in L-band 400G system only. This board includes two WDM components, multiplexing or demultiplexing the L-band signal and supervisory signal in the transmitting and receiving directions respectively. See Figure 7-13.

7-24

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description


TMB

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

1625 nm TL WDM L-band IN

LINE Coupler L-band RL WDM 1625 nm OUT MON

RMB

Figure 7-13 Principle block diagram of the FIU-04

7.6.3 Front Panel


Figure 7-14 shows the front panel of the FIU.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-25

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

RUN

RUN

RUN

RUN

RUN

ALM
MON

ALM

ALM MON

ALM

ALM

MON

MON

MON

IN OUT TC RC

IN OUT TC RC

IN OUT TC RC

IN OUT

OUT

TL RL TM RM

RC TC IN

TL RL TM RM

TL RL TM RM

TMB RMB TM RM

TMB RMB

FIU-01

FIU-02

FIU-03

FIU-04

FIU-06

Figure 7-14 Front panel of the FIU

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the FIU.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

7-26

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

Interfaces
There are nine optical interfaces on the front panel of the FIU-01.
Interface Connector type Description

TC/TL RC/RL IN/OUT TM/RM MON

LC LC LC LC LC

Transmits C/L band channels. Receives C/L band channels. Receives or transmit line signals. Transmits or receive the supervisory channel over 1510 nm. Connected with the MCA for monitoring performance.

There are 11 optical interfaces on the front panel of the FIU-02.


Interface Connector type Description

TC/TL RC/RL IN/OUT TM/RM

LC LC LC LC

Transmits C/L band channels. Receives C/L band channels. Receives or transmit line signal. Transmits or receive the supervisory channel over 1510 nm. Transmits or receive the backup supervisory channel over 1625 nm. Connected with the MCA for monitoring performance.

TMB/RMB LC (optional) MON LC

There are 7 optical interfaces on the front panel of the FIU-03/ FIU-06.
Interface Connector type Description

TC RC IN/OUT TM/RM MON

LC LC LC LC LC

Transmits C band channels. Receives C band channels. Receives or transmit line signal. Transmits or receive the supervisory channel over 1510 nm. Connected with the MCA for monitoring performance.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-27

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

There are 7 optical interfaces on the front panel of the FIU-04.


Interface Connector type Description

TL RL IN/OUT

LC LC LC

Transmits L band channels. Receives L band channels. Receives or transmit line signal. Transmits or receive the supervisory channel over 1510 nm. Connected with the MCA for monitoring performance.

TMB/RMB LC MON LC

7.6.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the FIU.
Table 7-1 Parameter specifications of FIU-01 (C+L+1510)
Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range

nm

C-band: 15291561 L-band: 15701604 Supervisory channel in C-band: 15001520

Insertion loss

dB

INTC: < 1.5 INTL: < 1.5 RCOUT: < 1.5 RLOUT: < 1.5 INTM (@M): <2.0(Note1) RMOUT(@M): <2.0

Isolation

dB

IN to TM (@ C): >40(Note1) IN to TC (@ L): >35(Note1) IN to TC (@ M): >20 IN to TL (@ C): >40

Return loss Directivity

dB dB

>40 >55

7-28

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Parameters Unit

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit Specifications

Polarization dependent loss (PDL)

dB

<0.2

Note1: @M, indicates the measured value of the 1510-nm optical supervisory signals. @C, indicates the measured value of the Cband optical signals. @L, indicates the measured value of the Lband optical signals.

Table 7-2 Parameter specifications of FIU-02 (C+L+1510+1625)


Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range

nm

C-band: 15291561 L-band: 15701604 Supervisory channel in C-band: 15001520 Supervisory channel in L-band: 16151635

Insertion loss

dB

INTC: < 1.5 INTL: < 1.5 RCOUT: < 1.5 RLOUT: < 1.5 INTM (@M): <2.0 INTMB(@MB): <2.0(Note1) RMOUT(@M): <2.0 RMBOUT(@MB): <2.0

Isolation

dB

IN to TM (@ C): >40 IN to TMB (@ L): >40 IN to TC(@ L): >35 IN to TC (@ M): >20 IN to TL (@ C): >40 IN to TL (@ MB): >12

Return loss Directivity Polarization dependent loss (PDL)

dB dB dB

>40 >55 <0.2

Note1: @ MB, indicates the measured value of the 1625-nm optical supervisory signals.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-29

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Table 7-3 Parameter specifications of FIU-03/06 (C+1510)


Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range

nm

C-band: 15291561 Supervisory channel in C-band: 15001520

Insertion loss

dB

INTC: 1.0 RCOUT: 1.0 INTM (@M): 1.5 RMOUT(@M): 1.5

Isolation

dB

IN to TM (@ C): > 40 IN to TC (@ M): > 12

Return loss Directivity Polarization dependent loss (PDL)

dB dB dB

>40 >55 <0.2

Table 7-4 Parameter specifications of FIU-04 (L+1625)


Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range

nm

L-band: 15701604 Supervisory channel in L-band: 16151635

Insertion loss

dB

INTL: < 1.0 RLOUT: < 1.0 INTMB (@MB): < 1.5 RMBOUT(@MB): < 1.5

Isolation

dB

IN to TMB (@L): > 40 IN to TL (@MB): >1 2

Return loss Directivity Polarization dependent loss (PDL)

dB dB dB

> 40 > 55 < 0.2

7-30

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

7 Optical Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Add and Drop Unit

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the FIU.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

FIU

4.3 W

4.8 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the FIU.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 0.9 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7-31

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

Optical Amplifier Unit

The OptiX BWS 1600G offers two types of optical fibre amplifiers. One is EDFA (Erbium-doped optical fibre amplifier) which is widely used for DWDM system. Optical signals can be directly amplified in erbium-doped fibre to compensate signal attenuation. The other is Raman optical fibre amplifier (simply called Raman amplifier) used in long-haul transmission. Together with EDFA, Raman amplifier can amplify optical signals with low noise, and suppress degradation of the signal-to-noise ratio. This greatly extends the transmission distance without any electrical regenerator. In the OptiX BWS 1600G, Raman amplifier is always used with EDFA. This chapter describes the optical amplifier units of the OptiX BWS 1600G in terms of: Functionality Working principle Front panel Parameter description Technical specifications Note The front panels shown in the schematic diagrams in this manual serve to identify the positions and silk screens of the optical interfaces.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-1

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

8.1 OAU
The OptiX BWS 1600G system has two kinds of OAUs in terms of hardware version: E2OAU and E3OAU. This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the OAU board. There are one type of the E2OAU: OAU-LG The OAU-LG is used for amplifying L-band optical signals. There are three types of the E3OAU, which can be used in the C-band system: OAUC01 OAUC03 OAUC05 These eight types of boards are the same in fulfilling functions. But the parameters of these boards are designed differently according to different applications.

8.1.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the OAU.
Functionality Description

Basic function Transmission distance Gain adjusting

Amplifies 80 channel optical signals of C-band or L-band with channel spacing of 50 GHz at the same time. The transmission distance can reach up to 80 km120 km without regeneration. Gain can be adjusted continuously from the minimum to the maximum. The gain of the C-band wavelength channels oriented the E3OAU can be adjusted within 2.5 dB of the gain boundary.

Online optical performance monitoring Gain lock function Transient control function Alarms and performance events monitoring

Provides an online monitoring port MON. Thus, the optical performance of optical signals can be checked online through the MCA board or optical spectrum analyzer. Adds or drops one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels. When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to realize the smooth upgrading and expansion. The OAU: Detects and reports the optical power. Detects and controls pump laser temperature. Detects pump driving current, back facet current, cooling current, and ambient temperature of board.

8-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

8.1.2 Working Principle


Figure 8-1 shows the principle block diagram of the OAU.
OUT IN EDFA optical module MON

Control and communication module

SCC

Figure 8-1 Principle block diagram of the OAU

(1) C-band OAU The EDFA optical module amplifies optical signals. The control and communication module detects and controls the working status of the EDFA optical module. The latter module also communicates with the SCC board. The OAU can access the DCM. The OAU adopts automatic gain control technology. This keeps the gain of each wavelength within allowed range in various conditions. In case of any abnormality in the line, the T2000 system and the SCC enable the automatic power control function. Thus, the total output optical power remains constant under a certain number of wavelengths. The OAU allows online spectrum analysis by providing monitoring port MON. Any external spectrum analyser or the built-in MCA can attach with MON. (2) L-band OAU The OptiX BWS 1600G system transmits 80 channels on C-band, and 80 channels on L-band, that is, 160 channels in total. But the EDFA amplification bandwidth is about 35 nm, covering a part of low loss window (1550 nm) of quartz single-mode fibre. To use the L-band sources, the EDFA amplification bandwidth must be expanded. Hence, the OAU adopts an erbium-doped fibre with high density and low loss. Such a fiber can compensate the impacts of low efficiency and high loss of L-band pump conversion. The L-band OAU and C-band OAU are similar in working principle.

8.1.3 Front Panel


Figure 8-2 and Figure 8-3 shows the front panel of the OAU.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-3

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

OAU

RUN ALM

MON

IN OUT TDC RDC

Figure 8-2 Front panel of the E2OAU

8-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

OAU

RUN ALM

MON

IN TDC RDC OUT

Figure 8-3 Front panel of the E3OAU

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the OAU.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are five optical interfaces on the front panel of the OAU.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-5

8 Optical Amplifier Unit Interface Connector type Description

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

IN OUT RDC

LC LC LC

Receives the signal to be amplified. Transmits the amplified signal. Receives signals from the DCM, or connects to the TDC interface directly by fibre jumper if no DCM is needed. Transmits signals to the DCM for dispersion compensation, or connects to the RDC interface directly by fibre jumper if no DCM is needed. Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.

TDC

LC

MON

LC

8.1.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The OptiX BWS 1600G system has two kinds of OAUs in terms of hardware version: E2OAU and E3OAU. The parameters of these two kinds are detailed in this section respectively. The E2OAU has one type: OAU-LG. For the specific parameters, see Table 8-1.
Table 8-1 Parameters of OAU-LG for L-band
Item Unit Performance parameter 23 dB 28 dB 33 dB

Working wavelength range Total input power range Single channel input power range Noise figure (NF) Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input end Maximum reflectance tolerable at input end 32 channels 40 channels 80 channels PA BA

nm dBm dBm dBm dBm dB dB dB dB dBm dB

1570.421603.57 32 to 3 32 to 18 32 to 19 32 to 22 < 5.5 <6 < 40 < 40 < 30 27

1570.421603.57 32 to 8 32 to 23 32 to 24 32 to 27 < 5.5 <6 < 40 < 40 < 30 27

1570.421603.57 32 to 13 32 to 28 32 to 29 32 < 5.5 <6 < 40 < 40 < 30 27

8-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Item Unit Performance parameter 23 dB 28 dB

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

33 dB

Maximum reflectance tolerable at output end Maximum total output power Gain response time to add/drop the channel Channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain tilt Polarization dependent loss (PDL)

dB dBm ms dB dB dB/dB dB

27 20 < 10 2126 2 2 0.5

27 20 < 10 2631 2 2 0.5

27 20 < 10 3136 2 2 0.5

The OAUC01, OAUC03 and OAUC05 of E3OAU are used in the: C 800G system (OptiX BWS 1600G type II) C 400G system (OptiX BWS 1600G type III) C 100G system (OptiX BWS 1600G type V, for 2.5 Gbit/s services) Long hop transmission system (OptiX BWS 1600G type VI) Table 8-2 shows the specifications of the OAUC01, Table 8-3 shows that of the OAUC03, and Table 8-4 shows that of the OAUC05.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-7

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Table 8-2 Parameters of OAUC01 for C band


Item Unit Performance parameter

Application code Working wavelength range Total input power range Single channel input power range 32 channels 40 channels 80 channels nm dBm dBm dBm dBm dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm ms dB dB dB/dB dB

20 dB 1529.161560.61 32 to 0 32 to 15 32 to 16 32 to 19 <9 (Note 1) <40 <40 <30 27 27 20 <10 20 23 2 2 0.5

26 dB 1529.161560.61 32 to 6 32 to 21 32 to 22 32 to 25 <7 (Note 1) <40 <40 <30 27 27 20 <10 23 29 2 2 0.5

31 dB 1529.161560.61 32 to 11 32 to 26 32 to 27 32 to 30 <6 (Note 1) <40 <40 <30 27 27 20 <10 29 31 2 2 0.5

Noise figure (NF) Output reflectance Input reflectance Pump leakage at input end Maximum reflectance tolerable at input end Maximum reflectance tolerable at output end Maximum total output power Gain response time to add/drop the channel Maximum channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain tilt Polarization dependent loss (PDL)

Note 1: The value for noise figure is varying with the gain which can be tunable. Only the typical value is given here. Note 2: As for E3OAUC01 amplifier, the total gain is 33 dB. The internal insertion loss is 2-13 dB, thus the gain varies from 20 to 31.

8-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

Table 8-3 Parameters of OAU-C03E for C band


Item Unit Performance parameter

Application code Working wavelength range Total input power range Single channel input power range 32 channels 40 channels 80 channels Noise figure (NF) Output reflectance Input reflectance Pump leakage at input end Maximum reflectance tolerable at input end Maximum reflectance tolerable at output end Maximum total output power Gain response time to add/drop the channel Maximum channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain tilt Polarization dependent loss (PDL) nm dBm dBm dBm dBm dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm ms dB dB dB/dB dB

24 dB 1529.161560.61 32 to 4 32 to 19 32 to 20 32 to 23 <7 (Note 1) <40 <40 <30 27 27 20 <10 24 28 2 2 0.5

29 dB 1529.161560.61 32 to 9 32 to 24 32 to 25 32 to 28 <6 (Note 1) <40 <40 <30 27 27 20 <10 28 30 2 2 0.5

36 dB 1529.161560.61 32 to 16 32 to 31 32 32 <6 (Note 1) <40 <40 <30 27 27 20 <10 30 36 2 2 0.5

Note 1: The value for noise figure is varying with the gain which can be tunable. Only the typical value is given here. Note 2: As for E3OAUC03 amplifier, the total gain is 38 dB. The internal insertion loss is 2-14 dB, thus the gain varies from 24 to 36.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-9

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Table 8-4 Parameters of OAUC05 for C band


Item Unit Performance parameter

Application code Working wavelength range Total input power range Single channel input power range 32 channels 40 channels 80 channels nm dBm dBm dBm dBm dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm ms dB dB dB/dB dB

23 dB 1529.161560.61 32 to 0 32 to 15 32 to 16 32 to 19 <9 (Note 1) <40 <40 <30 27 27 23 <10 23 26 2 2 0.5

30 dB 1529.161560.61 32 to 7 32 to 22 32 to 23 32 to 26 <7 (Note 1) <40 <40 <30 27 27 23 <10 26 33 2 2 0.5

34 dB 1529.161560.61 32 to 11 32 to 26 32 to 27 32 to 30 <6 (Note 1) <40 <40 <30 27 27 23 <10 33 34 2 2 0.5

Noise figure (NF) Output reflectance Input reflectance Pump leakage at input end Maximum reflectance tolerable at input end Maximum reflectance tolerable at output end Maximum total output power Gain response time to add/drop the channel Maximum channel gain Gain flatness Multi-channel gain tilt Polarization dependent loss (PDL)

Note 1: The value for noise figure is varying with the gain which can be tunable. Only the typical value is given here. Note 2: As for E3OAUC05 amplifier, the total gain is 36 dB. The internal insertion loss is 2-13 dB, thus the gain varies from 23 to 34.

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the OAU.

8-10

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Board Maximum power consumption at 250C

8 Optical Amplifier Unit Maximum power consumption at 550C

E2OAU E3OAU

42.0 W 30.0 W

70.0 W 50.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the OAU.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W) 2.4 kg 2 IU1IU5, IU8IU12

8.2 OBU
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the OBU board. The OBU has also two hardware versions: E2OBU and E3OBU. One type of the E2OBU is available: The OBU-L is used for amplifying L-band optical signals. The E3OBU is of two specifications, mainly applying to C-band system: OBUC03 and OBUC05.

8.2.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the OBU.
Functionality Description

Basic function

Amplifies 80 channel optical signals with channel spacing of 50 GHz at the same time. Enables the optical amplification of C-band and L-band. The transmission distance can reach up to 80 km120 km without regeneration.

Transmission distance

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-11

8 Optical Amplifier Unit Functionality Description

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Online optical performance monitoring Gain lock function

Provides an online monitoring port MON. Thus, the optical performance of optical signals can be checked online through the MCA board or optical spectrum analyzer. Adds or drops one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels. The output power variation of each channel of the optical amplifiers is less than 2 dB when the input signals of EDFA reduce from 80 channels to one channel.

Transient control function Alarms and performance events monitoring

When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to realize the smooth upgrading and expansion. The OBU can: Detect and report optical power. Detect and control pump laser temperature. Detect pump driving current, back facet current, cooling current and ambient temperature of board.

8.2.2 Working Principle


The working principle of the OBU is the same as that of the OAU. See section 8.1 OAU.

8.2.3 Front Panel


Figure 8-3 shows the front panel of the OBU.

8-12

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

OBU

RUN ALM

MON

IN OUT

Figure 8-4 Front panel of the OBU

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the OBU.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the OBU.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-13

8 Optical Amplifier Unit Interface Connector type Description

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

IN OUT MON

LC LC LC

Receives the signal to be amplified. Transmits the amplified signal. Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.

8.2.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
Table 8-5 shows the parameters of E2OBU.
Table 8-5 Parameters of OBU-L for L-band (for E2OBU)
Item Unit Performance parameter

Application Working wavelength range Total input power Single channel input power range 32 channels 40 channels 80 channels Noise figure (NF) Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input end Maximum reflectance tolerable at input end Maximum reflectance tolerable at output end Maximum total output power Gain response time to add/drop the channel Channel gain Channel gain range Gain flatness Multi-channel gain tilt Polarization dependent loss (PDL) dB dB/dB dB nm dBm dBm dBm dBm dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm ms dB

OBU03 1570.421603.57 22 to 3 22 to 18 22 to 19 22 <6 <40 <40 <30 27 27 20 <10 23 21 to 26 2 2 0.5

OBU05 1570.421603.57 22 to 0 NA 22 to 16 22 to 19 <7.5 <40 <40 <30 27 27 23 <10 23 21 to 25 2 2 0.5

8-14

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

Table 8-6 shows the parameters of the E3OBU.


Table 8-6 Parameters of OBUC03 and OBUC05
Item Unit Performance parameter

Application code Operating wavelength range Total input power Single channel input power range 32 channels 40 channels 80 channels Noise figure (NF) Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input end Maximum reflectance tolerable at input end Maximum reflectance tolerable at output end Maximum total output power Gain response time to add/drop the channel Channel gain Channel gain range Gain flatness Multi-channel gain tilt Polarization dependent loss (PDL) nm dBm dBm dBm dBm dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm ms dB dB dB dB/dB dB

OBUC03 1529.161560.61 24 to 3 24 to 18 24 to 19 24 <6 <40 <40 <30 27 27 20 <10 23 21 25 2 2 0.5

OBUC05 1529.161560.61 24 to 0 24 to 15 24 to 16 24 to 19 <7 <40 <40 <30 27 27 23 <10 23 21 25 2 2 0.5

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the OBU.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

E2OBU E3OBU

35.0 W 23.0 W

50.0 W 30.0 W

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-15

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the OBU.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W) 2.2 kg 2 IU1IU5, IU8IU12

8.3 OPU
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the OPU board.

8.3.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the OPU.
Functionality Description

Basic function Online optical performance monitoring Gain lock function

Amplifies C-band 80 channel optical signals at the same time. Provides an online monitoring port MON. Thus, the optical performance of optical signals can be checked online through the MCA board or optical spectrum analyser. Adds or drops one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not affect the signal gain of other channels. The output power variation of each channel of the optical amplifiers is less than 2 dB when the input signals of EDFA reduce from 80 channels to 1 channel.

Transient control function Alarms and performance events monitoring

When channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to realize the smooth upgrading and expansion. The OPU can: Detect and report optical power. Detect and control pump laser temperature. Detect pump driving current, back facet current, cooling current and ambient temperature of board.

8-16

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

8.3.2 Working Principle


The working principle of the OPU is the same as that of the OAU. See section 8.1 OAU.

8.3.3 Front Panel


Figure 8-4 shows the front panel of the OPU.

OPU

RUN ALM

MON

IN OUT

Figure 8-5 Front panel of the OPU

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the OPU.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-17

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the OPU.
Interface Connector type Description

IN OUT MON

LC LC LC

Receives the signal to be amplified. Transmits the amplified signal. Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.

8.3.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the OPU.
Item Unit Performance parameter

Operating wavelength range Total input power Single channel input power range 32 channels 40 channels 80 channels Noise figure (NF) Input reflectance Output reflectance Pump leakage at input end Maximum reflectance tolerable at input end Maximum reflectance tolerable at output end Maximum total output power Gain response time to add/drop the channel Channel gain Channel gain range Gain flatness Multi-channel gain tilt

nm dBm dBm dBm dBm dB dB dB dBm dB dB dBm ms dB dB dB dB/dB

1529.161560.61 32 to 8 32 to 23 32 to 24 32 to 27 <5.5 <40 <40 <30 27 27 15 <10 23 2125 2 2

8-18

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Item Unit

8 Optical Amplifier Unit Performance parameter

Polarization dependent loss (PDL)

dB

0.5

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the OPU.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

OPU

20.0 W

22.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the OPU.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W) 2.0 kg 2 IU1IU5, IU8IU12

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-19

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

8.4 HBA
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the HBA board. The HBA is applied in the transmit section of an OTM station of the long hop system (LHP). The purpose is to increase the output optical power of the signal and amplify the power in the transmit direction.

8.4.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the HBA.
Functionality Description

Basic function Typical Gain

Amplifies the power of C-band optical signal. Increases the output optical power of the signal. Provides two types of gain: 29 dB or 35 dB. The gain 29 dB corresponds to the 40-channel system (192.1 THz to 196.0 THz, with channel spacing being 100 GHz). The gain 35 dB corresponds to the 10-channel system (192.1 THz to 194.0 THz, with channel spacing being 200 GHz). The maximum output power is 26 dBm.

Online optical performance monitoring Alarms and performance events monitoring Information query Software upgrade online Power supply backup

Provides an online monitoring port MON. Thus, the optical performance of optical signals can be checked online through the MCA board or optical spectrum analyser. Checks and reports current gain. Inputs or outputs optical power, pump laser drive current, pump laser operating temperature, and EDFA optical module temperature. Queries ambient temperature of board, detailed information and software information of board Supports online load and upgrade of FPGA and software. Queries FPGA, board software version, board manufacturing information and the module type. The power module of the board adopts dual hot backup to check the working status of the power module and report alarms.

8.4.2 Working Principle


Figure 8-5 shows the principle block diagram of the HBA.

8-20

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

OUT IN EDFA optical module MON

Control and communication module

SCC

Figure 8-6 Principle block diagram of the HBA

The HBA consists of EDFA optical module and the control and communication module. EDFA optical module The board adopts integrated EDFA module, including EDFA optical module as well as related control and detection circuits. The EDFA optical module realises high-power amplification of optical signal on the basis of good gain flatness. The integrated EDFA module contains a built-in control system. This system controls EDFA optical module, checks all parameters, and communicates with the board through serial port communication circuit. Control and communication module The control and communication module is the central system of the board. This module links other functional units into a system. The module fulfils the control, monitoring and alarming functions of the board, as well as data communication between the HBA and the SCC. The module reports the information about alarms and performance events of the HBA to the SCC, and passes the command from the SCC to the HBA.

8.4.3 Front Panel


Figure 8-6 shows the front panel of the HBA.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-21

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

HBA

RUN ALM MON

IN

OUT

Figure 8-7 Front panel of the HBA

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the HBA.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the HBA.

8-22

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Interface Connector type Description

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

IN OUT MON

LC LSH/APC LC

Receives the signal to be amplified. Transmits the amplified signal. Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.

8.4.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
Item Unit Performance parameter 40-channel 10-channel

Operating wavelength range Total input power range Noise figure (NF) Output reflectance Output power range Gain response time to add/drop the channel Channel gain Gain flatness Polarization dependent loss (PDL) Polarization mode dispersion (PMD)

nm dBm dB dB dBm ms dB dB dB ps

192.1196.0 THz 19 to 3 <8 <45 1026 <10 29 2.5 <0.5 <0.5

192.1194.0 THz 19 to 9 <8 <45 1626 <10 35 2.5 <0.5 <0.5

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the HBA.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

HBA

24.0 W

26.4 W

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-23

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the HBA.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W) 2.6 kg 2 IU1IU5, IU8IU12

8.5 Raman Amplifier


This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the Raman amplifier board.

8.5.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the Raman amplifier.
Functionality Description

Basic function

Generates pump light with multiple channels and high power. Provides energy for signal optical amplification in transmission. Realises long-haul, broad-bandwidth, low-noise, and distributed online signal optical amplification.

Online optical performance monitoring Alarms and performance events monitoring

Provides an online monitoring port MON. Thus, the optical performance of optical signals can be checked online through the MCA board or optical spectrum analyser. Monitors performance indexes, including the: Output power of the board Pump cooling current Pump driving current Back-facet current

Auxiliary functions

Provides such functions: Auto-lock pump power. Switch on/off pump source. Divide signal light. Enable pump laser protection.

8-24

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

8.5.2 Working Principle


Usually, the Raman amplifier is used at the receive end of the DWDM system. This amplification is based on optical fibre non-linear effect: SRS (stimulated Raman scattering). In the OptiX BWS 1600G, the Raman amplifier is always used with the EDFA. According to the system capacity and volume, the OptiX BWS 1600G provides two types of Raman amplifiers including the RPC and RPA. RPC amplifies the C-band service channels. RPA amplifies all the160 service channels. So the RPA covers both C-band and L-band. Here, the RPA is taken as an example to describe the principle of the Raman amplifier. Figure 8-7 shows the functional block diagram of the RPA.
SYS LINE Raman pump source module MON

Control and communication module

SCC

Figure 8-8 Functional block diagram of the RPA

Pump light is generated by the laser in the Raman pump source module. The control and communication module: Drives the pump laser. Controls the temperature, on and off status of the laser Protects the laser in abnormal conditions. The RPC and the RPA work on the same principle, except that RPC is only used for amplification of C-band optical signals. Used with appropriate EDFA, the Raman amplifier reduces the flatness of system gain to be less than 2 dB. So the noise figure is greatly reduced.

Note When connecting/removing the fiber to/from the RPA, turn off the pump laser of the RPA first.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-25

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

8.5.3 Front Panel


Figure 8-8 shows the front panel of the RPA and RPC.

RPA

RPC

RUN ALM

RUN ALM

LINE

EXT
LINE

SYS MON
SYS MON

Figure 8-9 Front panel of the RPA and RPC

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the RPA and RPC.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

8-26

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

8 Optical Amplifier Unit

Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the RPA.
Interface Connector type Description

LINE SYS MON

LSH/APC LC LC

Receives the optical signal from the line. Transmits the amplified signal to the FIU. Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum.

There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the RPC.
Interface Connector type Description

LINE SYS MON EXT

LSH/APC LC LC LSH/APC

Receives optical signals from the line. Transmits amplified signals. Connected with MCA for online optical performance monitoring. As an extended optical interface. (no use)

8.5.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
Item Unit Performance parameter

Pump wavelength range Board type Maximum pump power Channel gain on G.652 fibre (Note 1) Channel gain on LEAF fibre (Note 1 & Note 2) Channel gain on TW RS fibre (Note 1 & Note 3) Effective noise figure on G.652 fibre Effective noise figure on LEAF fibre Effective noise figure on TW RS fibre Polarization dependent loss (PDL)

nm

14001500 C band: RPC C+L band: RPA 30 >10 >10 >10 1 0.5 0 0.5

dBm dB dB dB dB dB dB dB

29 >10 >12 >13 1 0 1.5 0.5

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

8-27

8 Optical Amplifier Unit Item Unit Performance parameter

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Temperature characteristic Output connector type

nm/C

1 LSH/APC (Note 4)

1 LSH/APC

Note 1: This gain refers to on-off gain, that is, the power difference between amplifier ON and amplifier OFF. Note 2: LEAF fibre is a kind of fibre called large effective aperture fibre. Note 3: TW RS fibre is a kind of fibre called True Wave Reduced Slope fibre, belongs to NZDSF. Note 4: The LSH/APC connector is also called E2000/APC connector.

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the RPA and RPC.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

RPA RPC

90.0 W 70.0 W

99.0 W 77.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the RPA and RPC
Item Specification RPA RPC

Weight Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

4.2 kg

4.2 kg

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W) 2 IU1IU5, IU8IU12

8-28

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

This chapter describes the optical supervisory units of the OptiX BWS 1600G in terms of: Functionality Working principle Front panel Technical specifications

Note The front panels shown in the schematic diagrams in this manual serve to identify the positions and silkscreen of the optical interfaces.

9.1 MCA
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the MCA board. The OptiX BWS 1600G provides four types of the MCA: MCA-4 (C): Applied for C-band, supporting spectral analysis for four channels of signals. MCA-4 (L): Applied for L-band, supporting spectral analysis for four channels of signals. MCA-8 (C): Applied for C-band, supporting spectral analysis for eight channels of signals. MCA-8 (L): Applied for L-band, supporting spectral analysis for eight channels of signals.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-1

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

9.1.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the MCA.
Functionality Description MCA-4 MCA-8

Basic function

Supervises the channel. Analyses the status of the channel. Generates alarms upon channel loss or new channel added. Supervises and reports the: Optical power Central wavelength Signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) Number of channels

Optical switch

Selects optical channels by using an optical switch.

9.1.2 Working Principle


Figure 9-1 shows the principle block diagram of the MCA.

Optical Spectrum Analysis Module

Driving/ Control Circuit

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 9-1 Principle block diagram of the MCA

The MCA provides online monitoring on central wavelength, power, OSNR and other parameters. These parameters are of eight or four channels of optical signals in different sites. The MCA also reports the result to the SCC. The MCA makes an easier locating of a fault. The MCA consists of an optical spectrum analysis (OSA) module and a driving/control circuit. The OSA module monitors the parameters such as central wavelength, optical power, OSNR and the number of optical wavelengths. Through the data interface, these parameters are sent to the CPU.

9-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

The CPU reports the result to the SCC and the SCC further reports the data to the T2000. So, you can view these parameters on the T2000. The driving/control circuit drives or controls the optical spectrum analysis module.

9.1.3 Front Panel


Figure 9-2 shows the front panel of the MCA-8.

MCA

RUN ALM

R01 R02

R03 R04 R05 R06

R07 R08

Figure 9-2 Front panel of the MCA-8

The front panel of the MCA-4 is similar with that of the MCA-8. Only the interfaces R01~R04 are on the front panel of the MCA-4.

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the MCA.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-3

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the MCA-8.
Interface Connector type Description

R01R08

LC

Connected with the MON interfaces of other boards to receive optical signals for analysis.

9.1.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the MCA-8.
Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range

nm

C-band: 15291561 L-band: 15701604

Detect range for single channel optical power Detect accuracy for optical power OSNR accuracy Detect accuracy for central wavelength

dBm dBm dB nm

10 to 30 1.5 1.5 (OSNR detect range: 13 to 19) 2 (OSNR detect range: 19 to 23) 0.1

Note: The OSNR detection function of the MCA is supported by the NRZ/CRZ system with a channel spacing of 100 GHz and the NRZ system with a channel spacing of 50 GHz. It is not supported by the CRZ system with a channel spacing of 50 GHz. The MCA in the CRZ system with a channel spacing of 50 GHz only supports the function to detect the power and the center wavelength.

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the MCA.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

MCA

7.0 W

7.7 W

9-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the MCA-8.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W) 1.7 kg 2 IU1IU5, IU8IU12

9.2 VA4
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the VA4 board.

9.2.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the VA4.
Functionality Description

Basic function

Adjusts the optical power of four channels of optical signals. Monitors the optical power and the attenuation, and reports alarms. Mainly used in OADM equipment. The VA4 is located before the M40 to adjust the power of the accessed optical signals.

Attenuation range

The range of variable attenuation is 2 dB to 20 dB, and the resolution is 0.5 dB.

9.2.2 Working Principle


Figure 9-3 shows the principle block diagram of the VA4.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-5

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT

Varible Optical Attenuator Varible Optical Attenuator CPU Varible Optical Attenuator Varible Optical Attenuator Communication module

SCC

Figure 9-3 Principle block diagram of the VA4

The VA4 consists of four variable optical attenuators and a control and communication module. The module controls the attenuation of the signal, protects the variable optical attenuator and communicates with the SCC.

9-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

9.2.3 Front Panel


Figure 9-4 shows the front panel of the VA4.

VA4

RUN ALM

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2 IN3 OUT3

IN4

OUT4

Figure 9-4 Front panel of the VA4

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the VA4.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-7

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the VA4.
Interface Connector type Description

IN1IN4 OUT1OU T4

LC LC

Receives signals which need power adjustment. Transmits signals after power adjustment.

9.2.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the VA4.
Parameters Unit Specifications

Attenuation range Adjustment accuracy

dB dB

220 0.5

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the VA4.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

VA4

10.0 W

11.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the VA4.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 1.5 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

9-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

9.3 VOA
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the VOA board.

9.3.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the VOA.
Functionality Description

Basic function

Adjusts the optical power of one optical signal according to the control command sent by the SCC. Monitors the optical power and the attenuation, and reports alarms. Mainly used in OADM and OLA equipment.

Attenuation range

The range of variable attenuation is 2 dB20 dB, and the resolution is 0.5 dB.

9.3.2 Working Principle


Figure 9-5 shows the principle block diagram of the VOA.

IN

Variable optical attenuator

OUT

Control and communication module

SCC

Figure 9-5 Principle block diagram of the VOA

The VOA is used to adjust the optical power of a single optical channel. The VOA consists of a variable optical attenuator and a control and communication module. The module controls the attenuation of the signal and communicates with the SCC.

9.3.3 Front Panel


Figure 9-6 shows the front panel of the VOA.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-9

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

VOA

RUN ALM

IN OUT

Figure 9-6 Front panel of the VOA

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the VOA.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the VOA.

9-10

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Interface Connector type Description

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

IN OUT

LC LC

Receives the signals to be adjusted. Transmits adjusted signals.

9.3.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the VOA.
Item Unit Value

Attenuation range Adjustment accuracy

dB dB

220 0.5

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the VOA.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

VOA

6.5 W

7.2 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the VOA.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 0.8 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-11

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

9.4 DGE
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the DGE board. Equalization of optical power means to approximately equalise the energy of optical signals of all channels. This improves the transmission performance. In the ultra-long haul transmission system, numerous optical amplifiers are concatenated. The gain spectrum of optical amplifier is not very flat. The spectrum varies with the absolute gain of the optical amplifier. Hence, after optical signals pass through several optical amplifiers, the flatness of spectrum is seriously affected. This results in decrease of OSNR, increase of bit errors and limitation of the transmission performance of the whole system. To solve these problems, a DGE is used to adjust the spectrum flatness. When the gain of the optical amplifier changes, the DGE dynamically adjusts and flattens the spectrum waveform in the operating bandwidth.

9.4.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the DGE.
Functionality Description

Basic function Information report and query

Adjusts the attenuation spectrum of each channel of optical signals, and thus equalising the gain dynamically. Reports the data to the T2000, such as: Input or output optical power Total insertion loss Currently-set insertion loss spectrum Optical module type Operating wavelength range Queries board working temperature, detailed information of the board, and board software version.

Software upgrade online Power supply backup

Supports online loading of FPGA and board software, and online upgrade of optical module software. Reliable backup of power supply: Adopts hot backup and supports power failure alarm.

9.4.2 Working Principle


Figure 9-7 shows the principle block diagram of the DGE.

9-12

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

IN

DGE optical module

OUT

Check & Control module

Communication module SCC

Figure 9-7 Principle block diagram of the DGE

The DGE is used in optical equaliser station (OEQ). By adjusting the insertion loss spectrum, the DGE dynamically adjusts the gain flatness caused by concatenation of optical amplifiers. The DGE consists of optical modules and electrical modules. The optical module is the core module of the board and dynamically adjusts the optical power of each wavelength. The electrical module consists of the check and control module and the communication module. The electrical module checks, controls and reports the parameters of the DGE optical module, and communicates with the SCC.

9.4.3 Front Panel


Figure 9-8 shows the front panel of the DGE.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-13

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

DGE

RUN ALM

IN OUT

Figure 9-8 Front panel of the DGE

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the DGE.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the DGE.

9-14

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Interface Connector type Description

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

IN OUT

LC LC

Inputs main path optical signal (to be equalized). Outputs main path optical signal (equalized).

9.4.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the DGE.
Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range Dynamic attenuation range Fixed insertion loss

nm dB dB

15291561 621 <6

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the DGE.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

DGE

20.0 W

22.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the DGE.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W) 2.4 kg 2 IU1IU5, IU8IU12

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-15

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

9.5 DSE
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the DSE board. The DSE has two types: DSE-I and DSE-II.

9.5.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the DSE.
Functionality Description

Basic function

The DSE is applied in the optical dispersion equalizer equipment. The DSE works with different types of DCMs to equalize dispersion slope. The DSE is only used for C-band optical signal. Reports the ambient temperature and alarm information of the board.

Information report

9.5.2 Working Principle


Figure 9-9 shows the principle block diagram of the DSE.
DSE IN Dispersion slope compensation interface module BD1 BA1 BD2 BA2 BD3 BA3 OUT

Dispersion compensation module

Figure 9-9 Principle block diagram of the DSE

The DSE-I provides three groups of optical interfaces for dispersion slope compensation. The working principle of the DSE-II is the same as that of the DSE-I. The DSE-II provides five groups of optical interfaces for dispersion slope compensation.

9.5.3 Front Panel


Figure 9-10 shows the front panel of the DSE-I and the DSE-II.

9-16

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

DSE

DSE

RUN ALM BA1 BA2

RUN ALM BA1 BA2

BD1 BD2 OUT BA3

BD1 BD2 BA3 BA4

IN BD3

BD3 BD4 OUTBA5

IN BD5

Figure 9-10 Front panel of the DSE-I and the DSE-II

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the DSE.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the DSE.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-17

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units Interface Connector type Description

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

IN OUT BA1BA5 BD1BD5

LC LC LC LC

Inputs the main path optical signal. Outputs the main path optical signal. Connected with the output port of the DCM. Connected with the input port of the DCM.

9.5.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the DSE.
Parameters Unit Specifications

Operating wavelength range Fixed insertion loss

nm dB

15291570 <3.0

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the DSE.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

DSE

4.3 W

4.8 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the DSE.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 0.9 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

9-18

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

9.6 GFU
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the GFU board. Through the gain flattening filter (GFF), the GFU equalises optical power by working with the E2OAU ,raman amplifier and ROP amplifier. This achieves gain flatness of cascaded optical amplifiers. There are two types of GFU boards, supporting applications at C-band and L-band respectively. Figure 9-11 shows the application location of the GFU in the system by working with E2OAU. The GFU usually connects to the TDC and RDC optical interfaces of the E2OAU. If the system adopts the DCM, the GFU can be connected in front of the DCM.

GFU OLA

DCM OAU OLA OLA

OLA: Optical line amplifier GFU: Gain flattening unit

OAU: Optical amplifier unit DCM: Dispersion compensation module

Figure 9-11 Location of the GFU in the system by working with E2OAU

9.6.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the GFU.
Functionality Description

Basic function

Equalises the optical power of cascaded optical amplifiers. Every 46 levels of cascading E2OAU or 2 levels of cascading raman amplifiers can use one GFU to offer static compensation for the gain flatness of the system. Supports the application of two GFFs, and thus optimising gain flatness of two fibres.

Information query Software loading online

Queries board ambient temperature, detailed board information, board software version and optical component type. Supports on-line loading of board software.

9.6.2 Working Principle


Figure 9-12 shows the principle block diagram of the GFU.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-19

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

IN1 IN2

GFF GFF

OUT1 OUT2

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Optical signal

Electical signal

Figure 9-12 Principle block diagram of the GFU

The GFU consists of optical modules and circuit modules. Through the communication module, the GFU reports related hardware information and alarm events to the SCC. Optical module The optical module is namely the GFF, a passive optical component. The GFU supports the application of two GFFs which are the core of the GFU. The GFF partially compensates the gain flatness of the cascaded amplifiers. CPU The CPU is the central unit of the board. It links other functional units. It provides board information to the communication module, and runs the commands of the SCC. The communication module receives these commands. Communication module The communication module communicates data between the GFU and the SCC. The module reports the alarms and performance events of the GFU to the SCC. The module also passes the commands, which are sent from the SCC, to the GFU.

9.6.3 Front Panel


Figure 9-13 shows the front panel of the GFU.

9-20

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

GFU

RUN ALM

IN1 IN2

OUT1OUT2

Figure 9-13 Front panel of the GFU

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the GFU.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-21

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the GFU.
Interface Connector type Description

IN1 OUT1 IN2 OUT2

LC LC LC LC

Receives optical signal of the first channel. Sends optical signal after gain flattening of the first channel. Receives optical signal of the second channel. Sends optical signal after gain flattening of the second channel.

9.6.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The parameter specifications of the GFU board are listed in Table 9-1, Table 9-2 and Table 9-3.
Table 9-1 Parameter specifications of GFU01 and GFU02 (used with E2OAU)
Parameters Unit Specifications

Working wavelength range Channel insertion loss Polarization dependent loss (PDL)

nm dB dB

15291561 1.512 0.5

Table 9-2 Parameter specifications of GFU03 (used with raman amplifier)


Parameters Unit Specifications

Working wavelength range Channel insertion loss Polarization dependent loss (PDL)

nm dB dB

15291561 1.05.0 0.5

9-22

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

9 Performance Detection and Adjustment Units

Table 9-3 Parameter specifications of GFU04 (used with ROP amplifier)


Parameters Unit Specifications

Working wavelength range Channel insertion loss Polarization dependent loss (PDL)

nm dB dB

15291561 0.56.0 0.5

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the GFU.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

GFU

4.3 W

4.8 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the GFU.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 0.9 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9-23

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

10

Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

The OptiX BWS 1600G provides an optical fibre line automatic monitoring system (OAMS) to alert the aging of fibre, alarm the line fibre fault and locate faults. The OAMS, built in the OptiX BWS 1600G, is an optional function. A built-in OAMS consists of the following three boards: FMU: Fibre measure unit board MWA: Measure wavelength access board MWF: Measure wavelength filter board Figure 10-1 shows the application of each board in the system.
DWDM node DWDM node DWDM node

MWF MWF MWA FMU

Figure 10-1 Application of OAMS in the system (on-line monitoring)

DWDM nodes can be the OTM, OLA, OADM, OEQ or REG. The FMU board sends out test optical pulse, as well as receives, collects, processes and reports reflected signal. By this way, the FMU board monitors the running conditions of the working optical fibre in real time. One FMU can monitor up to four optical fibres. The MWA board combines the service signal and test signal to one optical fibre for transmission. When the test signal and the service signal are transmitted in the same direction, the MWF filters out the test signal at the receive end. This eliminates the effects of the test signal on the system.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

10-1

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Note The front panels shown in the schematic diagrams have different sizes with the actual ones. These schematic diagrams serve to identify the positions and silkscreen of the optical interfaces.

10.1 FMU
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the FMU board. The FMU is the core board of the embedded OAMS. The FMU monitors the tested optical fibre and the testing optical fibre, and reports the test result.

10.1.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the FMU.
Functionality Description

Basic function

Sends out test optical pulse. Receives, collects, processes and reports the reflected signal, and thus monitoring the running conditions of the working optical fibre in real time. One FMU can monitor four optical fibres at the same time. It selects the optical fibre to be tested through the optical switch.

Monitoring modes

Supports two types of monitoring modes: online and standby optical fibre. The FMU can be configured with two OTDR modules of different wavelengths. The OTDR at 1310 nm is used for online monitoring, while the OTDR at 1550 nm for monitoring standby fibre.

Testing function Software upgrade online

Supports auto-test and manual test. Supports online load and upgrade of FPGA and board software.

10-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

10.1.2 Working Principle


Figure 10-2 shows the principle block diagram of the FMU.

1:4 optical switch

OTDR module

CPU

Communication module

SCC

Figure 10-2 Principle block diagram of the FMU

The FMU consists of four parts: Optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) module The OTDR module sends out monitoring optical pulse and receives reflected optical signal. After processing and analysis, the module reports the data to the CPU. 1:4 optical switch The 1:4 optical switch module inputs the monitoring optical signal, which is sent from the OTDR module, into the designated test optical fibre. This realises the monitoring upon four connected optical fibres. CPU module The CPU module rearranges the commands of the SCC and sends these commands to the OTDR module and optical switch module to control their operations. Besides, The CPU compares the data collected by the OTDR with the reference data stored in the board. If the data exceeds the threshold, an alarm raises. Communication module The communication module communicates the data between the FMU and the SCC.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

10-3

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

10.1.3 Front Panel


Figure 10-3 shows the front panel of the FMU.

FMU

RUN ALM

TFM1 TFM2

TFM3 TFM4

Figure 10-3 Front panel of the FMU

10-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the FMU.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the FMU.
Interface Connector type Description

TFM1 TFM2 TFM3 TFM4

LC LC LC LC

Monitoring optical interface. It accesses one optical fibre. Monitoring optical interface. It accesses one optical fibre. Monitoring optical interface. It accesses one optical fibre. Monitoring optical interface. It accesses one optical fibre.

10.1.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the FMU.
Item Unit Index Online monitor Standby fibre monitor

Test wavelength OTDR dynamic range Event dead zone Attenuation dead zone Pulse width

nm dB m m

131025 39.5 (Note1) 10 (Note2) 30 (Note3) 10ns, 30ns, 100ns, 300ns, 1s, 3s, 10s, 20s

155025 38.5 (Note1)

10ns, 30ns, 100ns, 300ns, 1s, 3s, 10s, 20s

Pulse output power Distance accuracy

dBm m

20 1m5 x 10-5 x test distance spacing between the sample points (not including the group index

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

10-5

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units Item Unit Index Online monitor

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Standby fibre monitor

error) Readout resolution Reflection measurement resolution Linearity Group index Working temperature C dB dB dB/dB 0.001 2.0 0.05 1.4001.700 5 to +55

Note1: The loss incurred by online optical switch and the coupler is considered for the FMU. The dynamic value is 12 dB smaller than the value of the OTDR component. Besides, the OTDR effective dynamic range in online monitor mode is different from that in standby fibre monitor mode. Note2: Test conditions: The pulse width of the test signal is 10ns, and the return loss is not more than 35 dB. Note3: Test conditions: The pulse width of the test signal is 10ns, and the return loss is not more than 35 dB.

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the FMU.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

FMU

25.0 W

27.5 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the FMU.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 114 mm (W) 2.5 kg 3 IU1IU4, IU8IU11

10-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

10.2 MWA
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the MWA board. The MWA multiplexes the monitoring wavelength of the OAMS with service wavelengths. This realises on-line monitoring upon the optical fibre.

10.2.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the MWA.
Functionality Description

Basic function

Multiplexes the OTDR optical fibre monitoring signal and service signal of the DWDM transmission system. Accesses optical fibre monitoring wavelength at 1310 nm, so as to realise on-line monitoring of optical fibres.

Information report

Reports the ambient temperature and alarm information of the board.

10.2.2 Working Principle


The MWA consists of optical modules and circuit modules. Optical module: Consists of multiple WDM multiplexers that access multiple channels of OTDR optical fibre monitoring signals in different cases. The optical module realises on-line monitoring upon optical fibre. Circuit module: Reports the board information to the SCC. Because the optical modules of the MWA are passive optical components, there is no direct relation between an optical module and a circuit module. The principle of the optical module is introduced below. Two types of the MWA can be configured in the OptiX BWS 1600G system. MWA-I: Usually used at the OTM station. The MWA-I carries two WDM multiplexing components and accesses two channels of OTDR monitoring optical signals. MWA-II: Usually used at the OLA, OEQ, OADM or REG station. The MWA-II carries four WDM multiplexing components and accesses four channels of OTDR monitoring optical signals. Figure 10-4 shows the principle block diagram of the MWA.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

10-7

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units


RFM1

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

TS1

WDM

LIN1

To FIU

To fiber line
WDM OUT1

RS1

RFM2

Monitoring signal

Service signal

Figure 10-4 Principle block diagram of the MWA

The MWA-I has six optical interfaces: LIN1/OUT1, TS1/RS1, and RFM1/RFM2 Below describes the working principle. In the receiving direction of the OTM unit: The service signal in the optical fibre enters the WDM module through LIN1 optical interface. At the same time, the OTDR monitoring signal from the FMU enters the WDM module through RFM1 optical interface of the MWA. The service signal and monitoring signal are multiplexed reversely in the WDM module. After passing the WDM module, the service signal is output to the FIU from TS1 optical interface along its original transmission direction. But the monitoring signal is transmitted in the contrary direction, entering LIN1 optical interface for monitoring. In the transmitting direction of the OTM: The service signal from the output optical interface of the FIU is output to the WDM module through RS1 optical interface. At the same time, the OTDR monitoring signal from the FMU board enters the WDM module through RFM2 optical interface. After being multiplexed, the two signals are output, through OUT1 optical interface, to the line fibre for monitoring. The principle of the MWA-II is the same as that of the MWA-I. But the MWA-II carries two more WDM components used at OLA, OEQ, OADM or REG station. These two more WDMs multiplex four channels of monitoring signals into the fibre at receive end and transmit end in two directions at the same time.

10-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

10.2.3 Front Panel


Figure 10-5 shows the front panel of the MWA-I and the MWA-II.

MWA

MWA

RUN ALM

RUN ALM LIN1OUT1

LIN1 OUT1

TS1 RS1

TS1 RS1 RFM1RFM2

RFM1RFM2

LIN2 OUT2 TS2 RS2

RFM3RFM4

Figure 10-5 Front panel of the MWA-I and the MWA-II

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the MWA.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

10-9

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the MWA-I.
Interface Connector type Description

LIN1 OUT1 TS1 RS1 RFM1 RFM2

LC LC LC LC LC LC

Input optical interface of the main path. Output optical interface of the main path. Service wavelength output optical interface, connected with the input optical interface of the FIU. Service wavelength input optical interface, connected with the output optical interface of the FIU. Monitoring wavelength access optical interface, connected with one output optical interface of the FMU. Monitoring wavelength access optical interface, connected with one output optical interface of the FMU.

There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the MWA-II.


Interface Connector type Description

LIN1/LIN2 OUT1/OUT2 TS1/TS2 RS1/RS2 RFM1/RFM2/ RFM3/RFM4

LC LC LC LC LC

Input optical interface of the main path. Output optical interface of the main path. Service wavelength output optical interface, connected with the input optical interface of the FIU. Service wavelength input optical interface, connected with the output optical interface of the FIU. Monitoring wavelength access optical interface, connected with one output optical interface of the FMU.

10-10

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

Note On the front panel, there are 12 optical interfaces, divided into two groups: LIN1/OUT1/TS1/RS1/RFM1/RFM2 LIN2/OUT2/TS2/RS2/RFM3/RFM4 Each interface in group 1 matches that in group 2 one to one. The interfaces are used in two directions of the regenerator.

10.2.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the MWA.
Item Unit Index

Wavelength range of the transmission channel Wavelength range of the reflection channel Insertion loss of the transmission channel (including that of the connector) Insertion loss of the reflection channel (including that of the connector) Flatness (whole working wavelength range) Isolation (transmission channel versus reflection channel) Isolation (reflection channel versus transmission channel) Return loss Directivity Polarization dependent loss Polarization mode dispersion Maximum input power Working temperature

nm nm dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB ps dBm C

15001635 12801340 1.2 1.0 0.4 40 40 45 55 0.1 0.1 27 -5 to +55

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the MWA.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

10-11

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units Board Maximum power consumption at 250C

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Maximum power consumption at 550C

MWA

2.0 W

2.2 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the MWA.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 0.8 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

10.3 MWF
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the MWF board. The MWF is used to filter out the monitoring wavelength of the OAMS. This is to eliminate the effects of the monitoring signal on the DWDM system when the monitoring signal passes through the optical amplifier. At the transmit end of the OTM or relay stations such as OLA, the direction of the monitoring signal is contrary to that of the service signal. So the MWF is not required for filtering. At the receive end, the monitoring signal and service signal are transmitted in the same direction. So, before the multiplexed signals enter the FIU, use the MWF to filter out the monitoring signal.

10.3.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the MWF.
Functionality Description

Basic function

Filters out the OTDR optical fibre monitoring signal of the OAMS. Correctly report various information of the board.

10-12

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

10.3.2 Working Principle


The MWF consists of optical modules and circuit modules. Optical module The optical module consists of one or multiple filtering components. The module filters out the OTDR optical fibre monitoring signal. Circuit module The module reports the board information to the SCC. Because the optical modules of the MWF are passive optical components, there is no direct relation between the optical module and the circuit module. The principle of the optical module is introduced below. Two types of MWF can be configured in the OptiX BWS 1600G system. MWF-I: Works in the OTM station. The MWF-I carries one filtering component and filters out one channel of the OTDR monitoring optical signal. MWF-II: Works in the OLA, OEQ, OADM or REG station. The MWF-II carries two filtering components and filters out two channels of OTDR monitoring optical signals at the same time. Figure 10-6 is the principle block diagram of the MWF-I.
OUT 1 Filter To FIU board IN 1 Line optical fiber

Monitoring signal

Service signal

Figure 10-6 Principle block diagram of the MWF-I

The MWF-I board has two optical interfaces: IN1/OUT1. The MWF-I is usually used at the receive end of the OTM station. The service signal transmitted over the line fibre and the OTDR monitoring signal are multiplexed and input to the filtering component through IN1. After the monitoring signal is filtered out, the service signal is output from OUT1 and input in the corresponding input optical interface of the FIU. The principle of the MWF-II is the same as that of the MWF-I, except that the MWF-II carries one more filtering component, which is used at the OLA, OEQ, OADM or REG station. This component filters out the monitoring signals in two directions at the receive end of the relay station. Figure 10-7 is the principle block diagram of the MWF-II.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

10-13

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

OUT 1 To FIU board OUT 2

Filter

IN 1 Line optical fiber IN 2

Filter

Monitoring signal

Service signal

Figure 10-7 Principle block diagram of MWF-II

10.3.3 Front Panel


Figure 10-8 shows the front panel of the MWF-I and the MWF-II.

10-14

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

MWF

MWF

RUN ALM

RUN ALM

IN1 OUT1

IN1 OUT1

IN2 OUT2

Figure 10-8 Front panel of the MWF-I and the MWF-II

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

10-15

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the MWF.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the MWF-I.
Interface Connector type Description

IN OUT

LC LC

The input optical interface of the main path, receiving the multiplexed signal from the line. The output optical interface of the main path, outputting the service signal to the input optical interface of the FIU.

There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the MWF-II.
Interface Connector type Description

IN1/IN2 OUT1/OU T2

LC LC

The input optical interface of the main path, receiving the multiplexed signal from the line. The output optical interface of the main path, outputting the service signal to the input optical interface of the FIU.

Note On the front panel, there are four optical interfaces, divided into two groups: IN1/OUT1 matches with IN2/OUT2 one to one, each used in two directions of a relay station.

10-16

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

10.3.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the MWF.
Item Unit Index

Passband wavelength range Stopband wavelength range Passband insertion loss (including that of the connector) Flatness (whole working wavelength range) Isolation (passband versus stopband) Return loss Polarization dependent loss Polarization mode dispersion Maximum input power Working temperature

nm nm dB

15001635 12801340 1.2

dB dB dB dB ps dBm C

0.4 40 40 0.1 0.1 27 -5 to +55

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the MWF.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

MWF

2.0 W

2.2 W

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

10-17

10 Optical Fibre Automatic Monitoring Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the MWF.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 0.8 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

10-18

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

11 Protection Units

11
Functionality Working principle Front panel Technical specifications

Protection Units

This chapter describes the optical protection unit of the OptiX BWS 1600G in terms of:

Note The front panels shown in the schematic diagrams in this manual serve to identify the positions and silkscreen of the optical interfaces.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

11-1

11 Protection Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

11.1 OCP
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the OCP board.

11.1.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the OCP.
Functionality Description

Basic function

The OCP provides 1:N (N8) OTU optical channel protection. The protection prevents the transmission services over the channel from being interrupted. This protection operates in a way called "single-fed and single receiving". This protection is dual-end switched and needs the support of automatic protection switching (APS) protocol. The whole switching process takes no more than 200 ms.

Protection scheme

Switching time

11.1.2 Working Principle


Figure 11-1 shows the principle block diagram of the OCP.
OUT1 OUT2 OUT8 TP RP IN8 IN2 IN1

RX1 Client side RX2 Coupler


Optical Tx module Optical Rx module

TX1 TX2 Coupler Client side

RX8 Optical switch Optical switch

TX8

Control circuit Communication module


Control circuit module

SCC

CPU

Figure 11-1 Principle block diagram of the OCP

The OCP consists of three parts: Optical transmitting module Optical receiving module Control circuit module

11-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

11 Protection Units

At the transmit end: The signal from the client side enters the OCP. Through the coupler, 8-channel protected signals at the client side are sent to the optical switch. If there is any abnormality in the working OTU, the optical switch selects one channel according to signal priority and send it to the protection OTU through the "TP" and "RP" optical ports. At the receive end: Eight channels in the OCP are connected to the client-side equipment. Use the optical switch to select the protected route corresponding to the transmit end. Couple the signals coming from the protection channel and the protected signal with the coupler (in application, two channels of signals cannot be valid at the same time). Output the signals to the signal channel at the client side. In the protection process, the function of the OCP is to: Receive the commands of the SCC. Drive optical switch according to the command. Connect to the corresponding channel. Enable the protection function.

11.1.3 Front Panel


Figure 11-2 shows the front panel of the OCP.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

11-3

11 Protection Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

OCP

RUN

ALM

Rx1 Rx2

Rx3 Rx4

Rx5 Rx6

OUT1OUT2 OUT3OUT4OUT5OUT6 Rx7 Rx8 Tx1 Tx2 Tx3 Tx4

OUT7OUT8 IN1 IN2 Tx7 Tx8

IN3 IN4 TP RP

Tx5 Tx6

IN5 IN6

IN7 IN8

Figure 11-2 Front panel of the OCP

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the OCP.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are 34 optical interfaces on the front panel of the OCP.

11-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Interface Connector type Description

11 Protection Units

RX1RX8 OUT1OU T8 IN1IN8 TX1TX8 RP TP

LC LC LC LC LC LC

Connects with the client-side equipment to receive eight channels of signals. Transmits coupled client-side channels to eight input ports of the working OTUs. Connects with OTUs to receive working channel signals. Connects with the client-side equipment to transmit eight working channels to external equipment. Connects with the protection OTU to receive protection signals. Connects with the protection OTU to transmit protection signals.

11.1.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table gives the details about the optical specifications of the OCP.
Item Unit Value

Range of wavelength Insertion loss (working channel) Insertion loss (protection channel)

nm dB dB

1290~1330 1530~1565 <4 <5.5

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the OCP.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

OCP

8.0 W

8.8 W

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

11-5

11 Protection Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the OCP.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 76 mm (W) 1.7 kg 2 IU2-IU6, IU9-IU13

11.2 OLP
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the OLP board.

11.2.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the OLP.
Functionality Description

Basic function

The OLP01 provides optical line protection. This ensures the services over the fibre line can be received as usual even when the line is faulty. The OLP03 provide the inter-subrack 1+1 path protection for one working/protection OTU pair.

Protection scheme

The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and single-end switching. When the performance of the working fibre declines, the system automatically switches the service from the working path to the protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS protocol is not needed.

11.2.2 Working Principle


Figure 11-3 shows the principle block diagram of the OLP01.

11-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description


OTU MUX OTU Client service OTU DMUX OTU MUX FIU OLP OLP FIU DMUX

11 Protection Units
OTU OTU Client service OTU OTU

Figure 11-3 Principle block diagram of the OLP

Functionally, an E1OLP01 board falls into two parts: dual-fed module and signal selection module. The dual-fed module divides the optical signal into two channels with the equal power. The module also sends over working and protection optical fibers at the same time. Signal selection module receives the optical signal from the working channel and the protection channel at the same time. The module detects and compares the optical power of two channels, and selects the optical signal of one channel to output. For the functions and working principle of the inter-subrack 1+1 protection provided by the OLP03, refer to OptiX BWS 1600G Backbone DWDM Optical Transmission System Technical Description.

11.2.3 Switching Type


The OLP has five switching types: Locked switching: This function is to lock the services on the active path, no matter the active or standby path is good or not. Forced switching: This function is to force the services to work either on the active or standby path, no matter the active or standby path is good or not. Fibre broken switching: If the active path is faulty while the standby channel is normal, the services are switched from active path to the standby path. If both paths are faulty, the services are not switched. If the services are transmitted on the standby path, the switching status is the same. The working mode can be set to revertive or non-revertive. In revertive mode, if the active path is recovered and confirmed to be normal for a certain period, the services are switched back to the active path. In non-revertive mode, even if the active path is recovered, the services remain on the standby path until a fault occurs to the standby path.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

11-7

11 Protection Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Manual switching You can also shift the service to any path. That is, you can use either the active or standby path as a service carrier. Manual switch is only effective when both active and standby paths are normal. Clear switching This function clears the switching state of the above switches. The table below lists the priorities of the switching types:
Switching type Priority

Clear switching Locked switching Forced switching Fibre broken switching and manual switching

Highest Second Third Lowest

If a higher level protection switching exists, lower level switching cannot be executed successfully. But if only the lower level switching exists, it can be executed successfully.

11.2.4 Front Panel


Figure 11-4 shows the front panel of the OLP.

11-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

11 Protection Units

OLP

RUN ALM

TO1 RI1

TO2 RI2 TI RO

Figure 11-4 Front panel of the OLP

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the OLP.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the OLP.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

11-9

11 Protection Units Interface Connector type Description

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

TI/RO TO1/TO2 RI1/RI2

LC LC LC

Connects with the FIU and access line signals. Transmits working and protection signals to the line fibre. Receives working and protection signals from the line fibre.

11.2.5 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the OLP.
Corresponding interfaces Item Unit Value

TI-TO1 TI-TO2 RI1-RO RI2-RO

Signal splitter insertion loss Signal selection insertion loss

dB dB dBm dB dB

<4 <1.5 7 to 35 3 5

Range of the input optical power Alarm threshold of optical power difference Switching threshold of optical power difference

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the OLP.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

OLP

7.0 W

7.7 W

11-10

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

11 Protection Units

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the OLP.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 0.8 kg 1 IU1IU6, IU8IU13

11.3 SCS
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the SCS board.

11.3.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the SCS.
Functionality Description

Basic function

Coordinated with the active or standby OTU, the SCS fulfils optical channel protection. The SCS also supports OTU board level protection of the same route. The channel protection supported by the SCS board does not need the support of protocol. Instead, the channel protection executes switching by detecting SD and SF events of the channel.

11.3.2 Working Principle


Figure 11-5 is a typical application of the SCS in the system.
Active channel Tx Tx
SCS

Rx Rx
SCS

Rx Rx Standby channel

Tx Tx

Figure 11-5 SCS in the OptiX BWS 1600G

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

11-11

11 Protection Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Note The diagram shows the implementation of dual-fed and signal selection for one channel of optical signal.

Figure 11-6 shows the principle block diagram of the SCS.


TI1 Dual-fed module TO11 TO12 RI11 RI12

RO1 Selection module

TI2 Dual-fed module

TO21 TO22 RI21 RI22

RO2 Selection module

Figure 11-6 Principle block diagram of the SCS

A single SCS can select dual-fed signals for two channels of optical signals. The processing of these two channels of optical signals are the same. Below describes the process. The system uses two SCS boards. The first SCS splits coming services into two signals with equal power. The first SCS sends the signals to the working and protection OTUs. After transmission over the working path and the protection path to the receive end, the working and protection OTUs convert the wavelengths. The other SCS combines the wavelengths and transmits these wavelengths to the client side. With two SCS boards, the system selectively accepts the dual-fed signals. Also, the system triggers the protection switching when LOS and B_EXC alarms are reported. In normal conditions, the working OTU at the receive end is in the working status and the protection OTU the idle. When the service fails, the protection switching is triggered by alarms. The system turns off the client-side transmitting laser of the working OTU and turn on that of the protection OTU.

11.3.3 Front Panel


Figure 11-7 shows the front panel of the SCS.

11-12

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

11 Protection Units

SCS

RUN ALM

TO11 RI11

TO21 RI21 TO12 RI12

TO22 RI22 TI1 RO1

TI2 RO2

Figure 11-7 Front panel of the SCS

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the SCS.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

11-13

11 Protection Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the SCS.
Interface Connector type Description

TI1 RO1 TI2 RO2 TO11/TO12 TO21/TO22 RI11/RI12 RI21/RI22

LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC

Transmits the first channel of client-side signals. Receives the first channel of client-side signals. Transmits the second channel of client-side signals. Receives the second channel of client-side signals. Transmits the first channel of signals to working and protection OTUs. Transmits the second channel of signals to working and protection OTUs. Receives the first channel of signals from working and protection OTUs. Receives the second channel of signals from working and protection OTUs.

11.3.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the SCS.
Item Unit Value

Single-mode insertion loss Multimode insertion loss

dB dB

<4 <4.5

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the SCS.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

SCS

4.3 W

4.7 W

11-14

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

11 Protection Units

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the SCS.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (length) x 218.5 mm (width) x 2 mm (thickness) 345 mm (length) x 38 mm (width) 0.7 kg 1 IU1 IU6, IU8 IU13

11.4 PBU
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the PBU board.

11.4.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the PBU.
Functionality Description

Basic function

The PBU provides centralised protection for OTUs power supply. The PBU can protect three types of power supplies (3.3 V, 5 V, and 5.2 V) of two OTUs at the same time. If three or more OTUs need protection, the backup function will fail, and all OTUs will not be protected.

Protection scheme

When any of the secondary power modules (3.3 V, 5 V, and 5.2 V) provided by the OTU fails, services can be switched to the PBU within 600 s. This realises board level protection and ensures normal operation of the OTU. The PBU adopts cool power backup. When the power supply of the OTU works normally, the backup power module on the PBU is idle. The OTU backup circuit on the PBU supports slow-startup. The slow-startup time of the OTU backup circuit is longer than that of an OTU working circuit. This ensures that the OTU is supplied with power by the working power supply when started.

Cool power backup

Slow-startup

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

11-15

11 Protection Units

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Caution When the OTU and PBU both work normally, swapping the PBU does not affect the work of the system and the OTU.

11.4.2 Working Principle


Figure 11-8 shows the principle block diagram of the PBU.
Power switching module Voltage detection CPU Communication module
5V 3.3V -5.2V to the back plane

-48V

SCC

Figure 11-8 Principle block diagram of the PBU

The PBU consists of three parts: Power switching module The power switching module consists of a slow-startup and filter circuit. This circuit converts 48 V DC into three types of power supplies (3.3 V, 5 V and 5.2 V) required by the OTU and sends the power to the backplane. Besides, the power switching module supplies power for the control and peripheral circuits of this board. Voltage detection module The voltage detection module checks the three types of power (3.3V, 5V, and 5.2V) output from the power switching module, and reports alarms in the case of overvoltage or undervoltage. Control system The control and information processing part consists of a CPU and a communication module. The CPU monitors the status of the power module on this board. Handling of continuous overvoltage at the output side of the power module:

11-16

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

11 Protection Units

If the OTU uses the backup power, and continuous overvoltage occurs, check whether the power module is abnormal with detection module and software. If so, an alarm is given without shutdown of the power. If the OTU does not use the backup power, but continuous overvoltage occurs to the backup power, an alarm is given and the output of the power module is shut down. The output of any faulty circuit is shut down (other two are not shut down).

11.4.3 Front Panel


Figure 11-9 shows the front panel of the PBU.

PBU

RUN ALM PBU

Figure 11-9 Front panel of the PBU

Indicators
There are three indicators on the front panel of the PBU.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

11-17

11 Protection Units Indicator Colour Description

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

RUN ALM PBU

Green Red Yellow

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator PBU running indicator

See Appendix A for details.

11.4.4 Technical Specifications


Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the PBU.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

PBU

145.0 W

160.0 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the PBU.
Item Specification

Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel Weight The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

321 mm (length) x 218.5 mm (width) x 2 mm (thickness) 345 mm (length) x 38 mm (width) 1.0 kg 1 IU1

11-18

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit

12

Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit


According to ITU-T Recommendations, the OptiX BWS 1600G adopts the optical supervisory channel with the carrier wavelength being 1510nm and 1625nm. The board that processes this channel is called optical supervisory channel processing board or supervisory board. The supervisory board monitors the optical channels, collects and transmits the orderwire and T2000 information. The optical supervisory channel and the main channel adopt WDM mode in transmission. The multiplexing and demultiplexing of the two are implemented by an FIU board. A system control and communication board (SCC) is the control centre of the OptiX BWS 1600G. The SCC manages the whole system, and communicates between the equipment and network management system. The SCC also processes the orderwire overhead. There is also a special SCC for the extended subrack, shorted as SCE. The only difference is that the SCE does not have the overhead processing function. This chapter describes the optical supervisory units and the SCC of the OptiX BWS 1600G in terms of: Functionality Working principle Front panel Technical specifications

Note The front panels shown in the schematic diagrams in this manual serve to identify the positions and silkscreen of the optical interfaces.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

12-1

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

12.1 SC1/SC2
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the SC1 board and the SC2 board.

12.1.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the SC1 and the SC2.
Functionality Description SC1 SC2

Basic function

The SC1 is a uni-directional optical supervisory channel unit, used in OTMs. The SC1 processes one supervisory channel.

The SC2 is a bi-directional supervisory channel unit, used in an OLA, OADM, OEQ, or REG. The SC2 processes two supervisory channels.

Technology characteristic

The optical supervisory channel (OSC) does not limit the pump wavelength of optical amplifier. The OSC does not limit the distance between two optical line amplifiers. The OSC does not restrict the service in 1310nm. When the line amplifier is faulty, the optical supervisory channel is still available. The SC1or the SC2 is independent of the SCC, that is, even if the SCC is not in position, The SC1or the SC2 can pass through the ECC and ensure the supervision on other stations.

Regeneration function

The SC1 is transmitted in sections, with 3R function. In each optical line amplifier, the information can be correctly received, and new supervisory information can be attached as well. The signal wavelength of supervisory channel in the OptiX BWS 1600G systems I, II, III, V and VI is 1510 nm; while the wavelength of supervisory signal in system IV is 1625 nm.

Wavelength

12.1.2 Working Principle


As the SC1 and the SC2 are the same in principle, more about the SC1 is discussed in this section. The SC2, are the same with the SC1 in hardware, function and application. But the SC2 can process one more optical supervisory channel. Figure 12-1 shows the principle block diagram of the SC1.

12-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description


SCC board

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit

RM

Optical receiving module

Overhead processing module

Optical transmitting module

TM

CPU

Communication module

SCC board

Figure 12-1 Principle block diagram of the SC1

Receiving module and transmitting module The receiving module receives optical supervisory signal and the transmitting module transmits optical supervisory signal. Overhead processing module The overhead processing module exchanges information with the SCC. It extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals and sends the bytes to the SCC for processing. After the overhead signals are processed by the SCC, the overhead processing module sends the electrical signals into the optical transmitting module. The overhead processing module also monitors performance and alarms, such as CRC4 bit errors counting, remote and out-of-frame alarm reporting. CPU CPU collects the performance and alarm information about the SC1 and reports to the SCC through the communication module. The CPU also implements other functions such as A/D conversion, environment temperature monitoring, and interface control (that is, laser shutdown, running and alarm indicators flashing). Besides, The CPU provides clock signals with appropriate frequency and phases for the nodes in the system.

12.1.3 Front Panel


Figure 12-2 shows the front panel of the SC1 and the SC2.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

12-3

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

SC1

SC2

RUN ALM

RUN ALM

TM

RM

TM1 TM2

RM1 RM2

Figure 12-2 Front panel of the SC1 and the SC2

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the SC1 or the SC2.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

12-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the SC1.
Interface Connector type Description

TM RM

LC LC

Transmits the supervisory channel. Receives the supervisory channel.

There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the SC2.
Interface Connector type Description

TM1/TM2 RM1/RM2

LC LC

Transmits the supervisory channel. Receives the supervisory channel.

12.1.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the SC1 and the SC2.
Parameters Specifications

Type Working wavelength range (nm) Signal rate (Mbit/s) SC1/SC2 TC1/TC2 Line code format Launched power (dBm) Optical source type Minimum receiver sensitivity (dBm) (BER=110-12) SC1/SC2 TC1/TC2

Normal power C band: 15001520 or L band: 16151635 2.048 (Note1) 8.192 (Note2) CMI 7 to 0 MLM LD 48 48

High power C band: 15001520 2.048 (Note1) 8.192 (Note2) CMI 5 to 10 MLM LD 48 48

Note1: It is the signal rate before CMI encoding. After CMI encoding the signal rate on the line would be 4 Mbit/s. Note2: It is the signal rate before CMI encoding. After CMI encoding the signal rate on the line would be 16 Mbit/s.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

12-5

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the SC1 and the SC2.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

SC1 SC2

4.0 W 7.0 W

4.4 W 7.7 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the SC1 and the SC2.
Item Specification SC1 SC2

Weight Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

0.9 kg

1.0 kg

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 1 IU6, IU8

12.2 TC1/TC2
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the TC1 board and the TC2 board.

12.2.1 Functionality
The following table details the functions of the TC1 and the TC2.
Functionality Description TC1 TC2

Basic function

The TC1 is a unidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit, used in OTMs. The TC1 receives or transmits the optical signal from or to one direction at the terminal station.

The TC2 is a bidirectional supervisory channel unit, used in the OLA, REG, OEQ and OADM. The TC2 receives or transmits the optical signals from or to two directions.

Processes and regenerates the supervisory channel as the SC1 and the SC2. Besides, the TC1 and the TC2 also provide the clock transmission function.

12-6

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Functionality Description TC1

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit

TC2

Clock transmission function

Adds or drops 3-channel E1 clock service, and provides the electrical interface for the external synchronous signal and the timing source for the synchronous equipment. The clock interface has the 2.048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz interface physical characteristics defined by the ITU-I G.703. Processes the synchronous information status byte: Judges the synchronous timing quality level according to S1 byte content. Reports synchronous status information. If the upper stream clock signal is missing, add clock invalid information to notify clock receiving equipment downstream.

Overhead processing

Protection schemes

Provides 1+1 board protection at equipment level (two TC1/TC2 boards plugged in slots 6 and 8, active/standby protection for each other) and redundancy protection with double optical wavelengths. Supervisory information and clock signals are transmitted in both 1510 nm and 1625 nm.

12.2.2 Working Principle


In the OptiX BWS 1600G, the TC2 provides an 8 Mbit/s channel. In this optical supervisory channel, overhead bytes and three 2 Mbit/s clock signals are transmitted, so that all optical repeaters can be managed by the T2000. Besides, the TC2 can also transmit or provide the clock to other network equipment. The TC1 or the TC2 processes the overhead and network clock signal in the supervisory channel. The processing of overhead is the same with that in the SC1 or SC2. Since the principles of TC1 and TC2 are the same, this section describes only the TC1 board. Figure 12-3 shows the principle block diagram of the TC1.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

12-7

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit


Clock interface

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Clock processing module


SCC RM TM

Receiving module

Overhead processing module

Transmitting module

CPU

communication module

SCC

Figure 12-3 Principle block diagram of the TC1

Compared with the SC1, a clock processing module is added to the TC1. The clock processing module realises the clock generation, clock extraction and clock synchronisation for the optical supervisory channel. This module is connected to clock interfaces for inputting and outputting external clock signals. The TC1 has similar modules as the SC1 except the clock processing module.

12.2.3 Front Panel


Figure 12-4 shows the front panel of the TC1 and the TC2.

12-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit

TC1

TC2

RUN ALM

RUN ALM

TM RM

TM1 TM2

RM1 RM2

Figure 12-4 Front panel of the TC1 and the TC2

Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel of the TC1 or the TC2.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM

Green Red

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TC1.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

12-9

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit Interface Connector type Description

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

TM RM

LC LC

Transmits the supervisory channel signal. Receives the supervisory channel signal.

There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the TC2.
Interface Connector type Description

TM1/TM2 RM1/RM2

LC LC

Transmits the supervisory channel signal. Receives the supervisory channel signal.

12.2.4 Technical Specifications


Optical Specifications
The following table details the optical specifications of the TC1 and the TC2.
Parameters Specifications

Type Working wavelength range (nm) Signal rate (Mbit/s) SC1/SC2 TC1/TC2 Line code format Launched power (dBm) Optical source type Minimum receiver sensitivity (dBm) (BER=110-12) SC1/SC2 TC1/TC2

Normal power C band: 15001520 or L band: 16151635 2.048 (Note1) 8.192 (Note2) CMI 7 to 0 MLM LD 48 48

High power C band: 15001520 2.048 (Note1) 8.192 (Note2) CMI 5 to 10 MLM LD 48 48

Note1: It is the signal rate before CMI encoding. After CMI encoding the signal rate on the line would be 4 Mbit/s. Note2: It is the signal rate before CMI encoding. After CMI encoding the signal rate on the line would be 16 Mbit/s.

Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the TC1 and the TC2.

12-10

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Board Maximum power consumption at 250C

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit Maximum power consumption at 550C

TC1 TC2

8.5 W 11.5 W

9.4 W 12.7 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the TC1 and the TC2.
Item Specification TC1 TC2

Weight Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

0.9 kg

1.1 kg

321 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 2 mm (T) 345 mm (H) x 38 mm (W) 1 IU6, IU8

12.3 SCC/SCE
This section describes the functions and technical specifications of the SCC board and the SCE board. The SCE applies to the extended subrack. The principle and function of the SCE are the same with that of the SCC. But the SCE has no overhead processing module.

12.3.1 Functionality
Figure 12-5 shows the logical functional block of the SCC.
Sn

SEMF

F Interface MCF

P N

D4-D12 D1-D3

Q Interface

Figure 12-5 Logical functional block diagram of SCC

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

12-11

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

SEMF The main function of synchronous equipment management function (SEMF) is to work with the T2000 of the OptiX BWS 1600G to manage the boards. The SEMF functional block exchanges management information with other functional blocks through the reference point. The SEMF also converts, processes and stores the performance data and alarm events received from other functional blocks. At the same time, The SEMF transmits the control and management information to other functional blocks of the equipment. MCF Message communication function (MCF) transmits various maintenance and management messages between the NMS and NE equipment, or among NEs. These messages are sent over D1D12 bytes of optical supervisory channel. The MCF also provides OAM interfaces so that the OptiX BWS 1600G can communicate data between the synchronisation equipment and the T2000. In an OptiX BWS 1600G NE, only one SCC board enables MCF function through the communication with the supervisory channel board. And the SCE board on other subracks in the NE exchanges information with the SCC through 10M Ethernet interfaces. Because the SCE communicates with other NE equipment indirectly. The SCE manages on boards in the same subrack, as mentioned before. The SCE reports the performance and alarm data to and receives management information from the SCC. Software function The BIOS software serves to:

Boot the system. Load and upgrade NE software. Perform hardware self-test of the SCC.

The NE software serves to perform real time monitoring, maintenance and management on the NEs by working with the T2000 and the SCC hardware. The NE software consists of a communication module (CM) and an administration module (AM). The CM: Handles the message communication. Transmits the operation, management, as well as maintenance information between the T2000 and NE equipment, or between NEs. While the AM: Manages the synchronisation equipment. Supports configuration, alarm, performance, security, and topology management of NMS.

12-12

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit

12.3.2 Working principle


Figure 12-6 shows the principle block diagram of the SCC board.
Optical supervisory boards

DCC interface

NM

Date communication interface

CPU

Overhead access module

Communication module

Other boards

Figure 12-6 Principle block diagram of the SCC

12.3.3 Functional Interfaces


The SCC provides functional interfaces to facilitate the communication between the functional modules of each board and the network management (NM), as shown in Table 12-1.
Table 12-1 Description of the functional interfaces of the SCC in the OptiX BWS 1600G system
Functional interface Description

F&f (Note) Ethernet (Note) OAM (Note)

Connect the RS-232 interface to a PC or a workstation for commissioning. TMN interface, local NE management interface, and internal communication interface, used for commissioning. The operation, administration and maintenance interface. The X.25 interface is provided to communicate with the terminal through the public packet switched network. Provides three orderwire phones and a 64 kbit/s co-directional data channel. Uses the F2 byte of the supervisory channel and possesses the features of both RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces. This interface can be used for express orderwire. The maximum rate is 19.2 kbit/s. Uses the F3 byte of the supervisory channel and possesses the features of both

F1 (Note) F2 (Note)

F3 (Note)

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

12-13

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit Functional interface Description

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces. This interface can be used for express orderwire. The maximum rate is 19.2 kbit/s. RS485 DCC communication Communication module Qx Communicates with other boards in the subrack. (reserved) Provides the data communication channel (DCC) of the supervisory link. Communicates with other boards in the subrack, collects performance data, and delivers the configuration. Network management communication interface.

Note: To fulfill the functions of the SCC board, corresponding physical interfaces are provided in the interface area of the OptiX BWS 1600G subrack. For detailed description, refer to OptiX BWS 1600G Backbone DWDM Optical Transmission System Hardware Description.

12.3.4 Front Panel


Figure 12-7 shows the front panel of the SCC and the SCE.

12-14

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit

SCC

SCE

RUN ALM ETN

RUN ALM ETN

RST

RST

ALC

ALC

Figure 12-7 Front panel of the SCC and the SCE

Indicators
There are three indicators on the front panel of the SCC or the SCE.
Indicator Colour Description

RUN ALM Ethernet

Green Red Yellow

Running status indicator Alarm status indicator Ethernet status indicator

See Appendix A for details.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

12-15

12 Optical Supervisory Units and System Control and Communication Unit

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Switches
There are two switches on the front panel of the SCC or the SCE.
Interface Description

RST ALC

Is used to reset a board, Is used to activate or deactivate the alarm buzzer which is located at the top of the cabinet.

12.3.5 Technical Specifications


Electrical Specifications
The following table details the electrical specifications of the SCC and the SCE.
Board Maximum power consumption at 250C Maximum power consumption at 550C

SCC SCE

10.5 W 10.5 W

11.5 W 11.5 W

Mechanical Specifications
The following table details the mechanical specifications of the SCC and the SCE.
Item Specification SCC SCE

Weight Dimensions of board (PCB) Dimensions of front panel The number of slots occupied Slots to hold the board

0.8 kg

0.8 kg

321 mm (length) x 218.5 mm (width) x 2 mm (thickness) 345 mm (length) x 24 mm (width) 1 IU7

12-16

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

A Indicators

A
A.1 Cabinet Indicators
Table A-1 Cabinet indicators
Indicator Level/ Category State ON

Indicators

There are three indicators of different colors on each cabinet: red, orange and green indicators. Table A-1 lists the related messages of each indicator.

OFF

Red Orange

Critical alarm Major alarm

There is a critical alarm. An audio signal is also generated. There is a major alarm. No audio signal is generated with it. Power supply is normal.

There is no critical alarm. There is no major alarm. Power supply is not normal.

Green

Power supply indicator

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

A-1

A Indicators

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

A.2 Board Indicators


A.2.1 Alarm Indicator
A red indicator on the front panel of each board shows system alarms. Table A-2 lists the related messages and descriptions.
Table A-2 Red alarm indicator
Flash state Description

Off Flash quickly (SCC) Three times every other second Twice every other second Once every other second On

There is no alarm. There is an incoming orderwire call. There is a critical alarm. There is a major alarm. There is a minor alarm. Hardware is faulty, or the self-check fails.

A.2.2 Running Indicator


A green indicator on the front panel of each board shows running state of the system. Table A-3 lists the related messages and descriptions.
Table A-3 Green running indicator
Flash state Description

Flash five times per second Flash once every other second 2 seconds on and 2 seconds off

The board is not in service. The board is in service (normal). The communication with the SCC unit stops, and the board is in off-line working state.

Table A-4 shows the running state of the SCC.


Table A-4 Green running Indicator on the SCC
Flash state Description

Flash five times per second Flash once every other second

The board is in off-line working state after the reset, or in self-check state. The board is in service (normal).

A-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

A Indicators

A.2.3 Communication Indicator


A orange indicator on the front panel of SCC/SCE board is the Ethernet communication indicator. Table A-5 lists the related messages and descriptions.
Table A-5 Orange indicator
Flash state Description

Off On Flashing

The connection between NE and NM computer is abnormal or broken. The connection between NE and NM computer is normal. There is data transmitted between gateway NE and NM computer.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

A-3

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

B Power Consumption and Weight of the Boards

B
Board

Power Consumption and Weight of the Boards


Table B-1 lists the power consumption and weight of boards. Note that the power consumption values are measured in normal working conditions (25C) and under temperature of 55C.
Table B-1 OptiX BWS 1600G equipment board information
Maximum power consumption at 250C (W) Maximum power consumption at 550C (W) Weight (kg) Slots occupied

E3LWF E2LWF E3LWFS E2LWFS TMX TMXS LWC1 LDG FDG LBE LBES LWX LWM TMR TMRS TRC1

27.1 32.9 40.0 41.7 42.0 46.4 21.5 29.5 34.5 31.6 44.3 27.0 27.0 22.3 35.0 21.5

29.8 36.2 44.0 45.8 46.2 51.0 23.6 33.0 38.0 34.8 48.7 29.7 29.7 24.5 38.5 23.0

1.4 1.6 1.4 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.1 1.0 1.0 1.4 1.7 1.0 1.0 1.3 1.3 1.0

1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

B-1

B Power Consumption and Weight of the Boards Board Maximum power consumption at 250C (W) Maximum power consumption at 550C (W)

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description Weight (kg) Slots occupied

M40 / D40 V40 MR2 DWC ITL FIU E2OAU E3OAU E3OBU E2OBU OPU HBA RPC RPA MCA VA4 VOA DGE DSE GFU TC1 TC2 SC1 SC2 SCC / SCE OCP OLP SCS PBU

20.0 46.0 7.0 16.0 30.0 4.3 42.0 30.0 23.0 35.0 20.0 24.0 70.0 90.0 7.0 10.0 6.5 20.0 4.3 4.3 8.5 11.5 4.0 7.0 10.5 8.0 7.0 4.3 145.0

22.0 50.6 7.7 17.6 33.0 4.8 70.0 50.0 30.0 50.0 22.0 26.4 77.0 99.0 7.7 11.0 7.2 22.0 4.8 4.8 9.4 12.7 4.4 7.7 11.5 8.8 7.7 4.7 159.5

1.6 2.2 1.1 0.9 2.0 0.9 2.4 2.4 2.2 2.2 2.0 2.6 4.2 4.2 1.7 1.5 0.8 2.4 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.1 0.9 1.0 0.8 1.7 0.8 0.7 1.0

2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1

B-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

C Glossary

C
This document defines the following terms:
A ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown. Attenuator Automatic gain control technology

Glossary

A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels. A passive component that produces a controlled signal attenuation in an optical fiber transmission line. A technique which is used to adjust the gain of each wavelength signal within allowed range.

B BER C Channel spacing CRZ D DCC Data Communication Channel. Within an STM-N signal there are two DCC channels, comprising bytes D1-D3, giving a 192 kbit/s channel, and bytes D4-D12, giving a 576 kbit/s channel. D1-D3 (DCCR) are accessible by all SDH NEs whereas D4-D12 (DCCM), not being part of the regenerator section overhead, are not accessible at regenerators. Distributed services DWDM The transmitting services are distributed between each neighboring nodes connected over a ring network. Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing. DWDM technology utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with spacing of 100GHz or 50GHz as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber. The centre-to-centre difference in frequency or wavelength between adjacent channels in a WDM device. Chirped Return To Zero. Bit Error Rate. The number of errors expected in a transmission.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

C-1

C Glossary

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

E ECC Embedded Control Channel. An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer. Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier. Optical fiber doped with the rare earth element erbium, which can amplify at 1530 to 1610 nm when pumped by an external light source. Electric Supervisory Channel. It owns the same function with OSC to realize the communication among all the nodes and transmit the monitoring data in the optical transmission network. The difference is monitoring data of ESC is introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals. A data link level protocol comprising the OSI model's bottom two layers. It is a broadcast networking technology that can use several different physical media, including twisted pair cable and coaxial cable. Ethernet usually uses CSMA/CD. TCP/IP is commonly used with Ethernet networks.

EDFA

ESC

Ethernet

F FEC Fiber-spooling G Gain In an OA which is externally connected to an input jumper fiber. The increase of signal optical power from the output end of the jumper fiber to the OA output port, expressed in dB. Forward Error Correction. Method to detect and correct certain error conditions with redundant coding. Fiber-spooling is used to coil up redundant fiber jumpers.

J Jitter L LAN N NE Network Element. A stand-alone physical entity that supports at least network element functions and may also support operations system function or mediation functions. It contains managed objects, a message communication function and a management applications function. Network Management. Any aspect of monitoring or controlling a network, including all administration details. Non Return to Zero. A digital code in which the signal level is low for a 0 bit and high for a 1 bit and dose not return to 0 between successive 1 bits. Local Area Network. A collection of devices connected to enable communications between themselves on a single physical medium. Variations in a short waveform caused by voltage fluctuations.

NM NRZ O

C-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

C Glossary

OCP

Optical Channel Protection. With the way to back up the working optical channel, it supports primary channel with multiple wavelengths and standby one in order to be against the situation that there is any fault in the primary channel. Optical Carrier. A carrier rate specified in the SONET standard. Optical Line Amplifier. A device that amplifies an input optical signal without converting it into electrical form. The best developed are optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element erbium. Optical Line Protection. With the way to back up the working link, it supports primary optical transmitting link with multiple wavelengths and standby one in order to be against the situation that there is any fault in the primary link. A device or subsystem in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the stimulated emission taking place in an suitable active medium. In this active medium a population inversion, needed to advantage stimulated emission with respect to absorption, is achieved and maintained by means of a suitable pumping system. A component normally attached to an optical cable or piece of apparatus for the purpose of providing frequent optical interconnection/disconnection of optical fibers or cables. A term which is used as a synonym for a branching device. The term is also used to define a structure for transferring optical power between two fibers or between an active device and a fiber. A device which performs the inverse operation of a wavelength multiplexer, where the input is an optical signal comprising two or more wavelength ranges and the output of each port is a different preselected wavelength range. A branching device with two or more input ports and one output port where the light in each input port is restricted to a preselected wavelength range and the output is the combination of the light from the input ports. An instrument that scans the spectrum to record power as a function of wavelength. A passive component possessing two or more ports which selectively transmits, redirects, or blocks optical power in an optical fiber transmission line. Output Optical Signal-to-noise Ratio (applicable to optically amplified transmitters only). The ratio of the optical signal power to the optical noise power at the OAT output port, measured over a specified optical bandwidth.

OC-x OLA

OLP

Optical amplifier

Optical connector

Optical coupler

Optical demultiplexer Optical multiplexer

Optical spectrum analyzer Optical switch OSNR

P PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy. It is the first multiplexing hierarchy used in digital transmission systems. The base frequency was 64Kbit/s, multiplexed up to 2048, 8448, 34,368 and 139,264 kbit/s. There was more than one standard system and it varied between Europe, the US and Japan.

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

C-3

C Glossary

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

R Ring network ROADM Type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be a cycle. Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer. A device that can block or pass through any wavelength channel carrying the multiplexing signals so as to implement the reconfiguration of the corresponding wavelength in the main optical path. Therefore, it can configure flexibly and dynamically the wavelength resource among each node in the network under the situation not to impact the running of the working channel.

S SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transport structures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads over physical transmission networks. A technical solution can extend effectively the transmitting distance of DWDM system with the application of Super CRZ encoding and the advanced phase modulation capability.

SuperWDM

T Telecom management network V VOA W WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing. WDM technology utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber. Variable Optical Attenuator. An attenuator in which the attenuation can be varied. The entity which provides the means used to transport and process information related to management functions for the telecommunications network.

C-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

D Acronyms and Abbreviations

D
A ADM AFEC AGC ALS APE ASE AWG B BA BER C CLNS CMI CPU CRC CRZ CSES D DCC DCF DCM DCN

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Add/Drop Multiplexer Advanced Forward Error Correction Automatic Gain Control Automatic Laser Shutdown Automatic Power Equilibrium Amplified Spontaneous Emission Arrayed Waveguide Grating

Booster Amplifier Bit Error Ratio

Connectionless Network Layer Service Coded Mark Inversion Central Processing Unit Cyclical Redundancy Check Chirped Return to Zero Continuous Severely Errored Second

Data Communication Channel Dispersion Compensation Fiber Dispersion Compensation Module Data Communication Network

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

D-1

D Acronyms and Abbreviations

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

DDN DFB DSP DWDM E ECC EDFA EFEC ELH EMC ETSI F FEC FIFO FPGA FWM G GE GUI I IEEE ITU-T L LAN LCN LCT LD M MCF MD MPI-R MPI-S

Digital Data Network Distributed Feedback Digital Signal Processing Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex

Embedded Control Channel Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier Enhanced Forward Error Correction Extra Long Haul Electromagnetic Compatibility European Telecommunication Standards Institute

Forward Error Correction First In First Out Field Programmable Gate Array Four-Wave Mixing

Gigabit Ethernet Graphical User Interface

Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Telecommunication Sector

Local Area Network Local Communication Network Local Craft Terminal Laser Diode

Message Communication Function Mediation Device Main Path Interface at the Receiver Main Path Interface at the Transmitter

D-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

D Acronyms and Abbreviations

MQW N NE NF NRZ O OA OADM OD ODF OEQ OHP OLA OM OMS ORL OS OSC OSI OSNR OTM OTS OTU OTUk P PDH PDL PIN PMD PON POS

Multi Quantum Well

Network Element Noise Figure Non Return to Zero

Optical Amplifier Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer Optical Demultiplexing Optical Distribution Frame Optical Equalizer Overhead Processing Optical Line Amplifier Optical Multiplexing Optical Multiplex Section Optical Return Loss Operations System Optical Supervisory Channel Open Systems Interconnection Optical Signal/Noise Ratio Optical Terminal Multiplexer Optical Transmission Section Optical Transponder Unit Optical Channel Transport Unit(G.709)

Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Polarization Dependent Loss Positive Intrinsic Negative Polarization Mode Dispersion Passive Optical Network Packet Over SDH/SONET

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

D-3

D Acronyms and Abbreviations

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

R RS Q QA S SBS SCC SDH SLIP SLM SNMP SONET SPM SRS STM T TCP/IP TDM TEC TMN TTL U UAT X XPM W WDM WS Wavelength Division Multiplex Work Station Cross Phase Modulation Unavailable Time Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Time Division Multiplexing Thermoelectric Cool Telecommunication Management Network Transistor-Transistor Logic Stimulated Brillouin Scattering System Control & Communication Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Serial Line Internet Protocol Single Longitudinal Mode Simple Network Management Protocol Synchronous Optical Network Self Phase Modulation Stimulated Raman Scattering Synchronous Transport Module Q Adaptation Reed-Solomon

D-4

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Index

Index
A
abbreviation, D-1 acronym, D-1 appearance board, 5-4 functionality, 9-19 DGE board front panel, 9-13 functionality, 9-12 technical specification, 9-15 working principle, 9-12 DSE board front panel, 9-16 functionality, 9-16 technical specification, 9-18 working principle, 9-16 DWC board front panel, 7-16 functionality, 7-14 technical specification, 7-17 working principle, 7-15

B
board appearance, 5-4 indicator, A-2 overview, 5-1 power consumption, B-1 type, 5-1 weight, B-1

C
cabinet capacity, 1-4 ETSI cabinet, 1-2 indicator, A-1 parameter, 1-4 structure, 1-2 connector DB9, 3-4 plug-in, 3-4 RJ45, 3-3, 3-4

E
EDFA, 8-1

F
FAN, 3-5 fan tray assembly. see FAN FDG board functionality, 6-59 technical specification, 6-62 working principle, 6-59 FIU board front panel, 7-25 functionality, 7-23 technical specification, 7-28 type, 7-22 working principle, 7-23 FMU board front panel, 10-4 functionality, 10-2 technical specification, 10-5

D
D40 board front panel, 7-7 functionality, 7-6 technical specification, 7-9 working principle, 7-7 DCM, 4-1 DCM frame, 4-2 DFU board

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Index

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

working principle, 10-3 frame DCM, 4-2 HUB, 4-4

G
GFU board front panel, 9-20 technical specification, 9-22 working principle, 9-19

H
HBA board front panel, 8-21 functionality, 8-20 technical specification, 8-23 working principle, 8-20 HUB frame, 4-4

I
indicator alarm, A-2 communication, A-3 running, A-2 interface power box, 2-5 subrack, 3-3 ITL board front panel, 7-20 functionality, 7-19 parameter description, 7-21 technical specification, 7-21 working principle, 7-19

L
LBE board front panel, 6-15 functionality, 6-13 technical specification, 6-16 working principle, 6-14 LBES board front panel, 6-15 functionality, 6-13 technical specification, 6-16 working principle, 6-14 LDG board front panel, 6-60

functionality, 6-59 technical specification, 6-62 working principle, 6-59 LOG board front panel, 6-66 functionality, 6-64 technical specification, 6-67 working principle, 6-65 LOGS board front panel, 6-66 functionality, 6-64 technical specification, 6-67 working principle, 6-65 LRF board front panel, 6-10 functionality, 6-8 technical specification, 6-11 working principle, 6-9 LRFS board front panel, 6-10 functionality, 6-8 technical specification, 6-11 working principle, 6-9 LWC1 board front panel, 6-30 functionality, 6-29 technical specification, 6-32 working principle, 6-29 LWF board front panel, 6-4 functionality, 6-2 technical specification, 6-5 working principle, 6-3 LWFS board front panel, 6-4 functionality, 6-2 technical specification, 6-5 working principle, 6-3 LWM board front panel, 6-41 functionality, 6-39 technical specification, 6-42 working principle, 6-40 LWMR board front panel, 6-45 functionality, 6-44 technical specification, 6-47 working principle, 6-45

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Index

LWX board front panel, 6-50 functionality, 6-48 technical specification, 6-51 working principle, 6-49 LWXR board front panel, 6-55 functionality, 6-54 technical specification, 6-57 working principle, 6-54

M
M40 board front panel, 7-3 functionality, 7-2 technical specification, 7-5 working principle, 7-2 MCA board front panel, 9-3 functionality, 9-2 technical specification, 9-4 working principle, 9-2 MR2 board front panel, 7-11 functionality, 7-10 technical specification, 7-13 working principle, 7-10 MWA board front panel, 10-9 functionality, 10-7 technical specification, 10-11 working principle, 10-7 MWF board front panel, 10-14 functionality, 10-12 technical specification, 10-17 working principle, 10-13

OAU05, parameter, 8-7 OBU board front panel, 8-12 functionality, 8-11 technical specification, 8-14 working principle, 8-12 OBUC03 parameter, 8-15 OBUC05 parameter, 8-15 OCP board front panel, 11-3 functionality, 11-2 technical specification, 11-5 working principle, 11-2 OLP board front panel, 11-8 functionality, 11-6 switch type, 11-7 technical specification, 11-10 working principle, 11-6 OPU board front panel, 8-17 functionality, 8-16 technical specification, 8-18 working principle, 8-17

P
parameter cabinet, 1-4 power box, 2-9 subrack, 3-6, 4-2 PBU board front panel, 11-17 functionality, 11-15 working principle, 11-16 power box alarm interface, 2-5 DIP switch, 2-4 function, 2-1 interface, 2-5 panel description, 2-2 parameter, 2-9 serial interface, 2-5 power consumption board, B-1 cabinet, 1-4 subrack, 3-6

O
OAMS, 10-1 OAU CG/LG parameter, 8-6 OAU board front panel, 8-3 functionality, 8-2 technical specification, 8-6 working principle, 8-3

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Index

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

R
Raman amplifier, 8-1, 8-24 front panel, 8-26 functionality, 8-24 technical specification, 8-27 working principle, 8-25

T
TC1 board front panel, 12-8 functionality, 12-6 technical specification, 12-10 working principle, 12-7 TC2 board front panel, 12-8 functionality, 12-6 technical specification, 12-10 working principle, 12-7 TMR board front panel, 6-25 functionality, 6-24 technical specification, 6-27 working principle, 6-25 TMRS board front panel, 6-25 functionality, 6-24 technical specification, 6-27 working principle, 6-25 TMX board front panel, 6-20 functionality, 6-18 technical specification, 6-21 working principle, 6-19 TMXS board front panel, 6-20 functionality, 6-18 technical specification, 6-21 working principle, 6-19 TRC1 board front panel, 6-36 functionality, 6-35 technical specification, 6-38 working principle, 6-36

S
SC1 board front panel, 12-3 functionality, 12-2 technical specification, 12-5 working principle, 12-2 SC2 board front panel, 12-3 functionality, 12-2 technical specification, 12-5 working principle, 12-2 SCC communication indicator, A-3 running state, A-2 SCC board front panel, 12-13 functionality, 12-11 technical specification, 12-15 working principle, 12-13 SCC indicator running. see also indicator running SCE board front panel, 12-13 functionality, 12-11 technical specification, 12-15 working principle, 12-13 SCS board front panel, 11-12 functionality, 11-11 technical specification, 11-14, 11-18 working principle, 11-11 structure cabinet, 1-2 subrack, 3-1 subrack interface, 3-3 parameter, 3-6, 4-2 structure, 3-1

V
V40 board front panel, 7-3 functionality, 7-2 technical specification, 7-5 working principle, 7-2 VA4 board front panel, 9-7 functionality, 9-5 technical specification, 9-8

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

OptiX BWS 1600G Hardware Description

Index

working principle, 9-5 VOA board front panel, 9-9 functionality, 9-9 technical specification, 9-11 working principle, 9-9

W
weight board, B-1 cabinet, 1-4 subrack, 3-6

T2-042580-20060630-C-1.32

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Você também pode gostar